Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 418

PROJET SERIES PS4.

5
SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Copyright © 2015 Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited Ltd.


All Rights Reserved.
Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

PROJET SERIES
PS4.5 SIMULATOR
OPERATIONS
MANUAL

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Copyright © 2015 – Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved.

Printed in Australia

THE CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL ARE STRICTLY CONFIDENTIAL.

This publication is intended for use Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd and PS4.5 Operators for
operational purposes only or for use by National Aviation Administrators (NAA) as required.
If you are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately return it to its
rightful owner or destroy the document. No part of this document may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language, in any
form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Pacific Simulators 2010
Limited. It is prohibited for copies of this publication to be made externally or internally
within the above organisations without written permission from Pacific Simulators 2010
Limited.

WARNING – THIS MANUAL AND PROCEDURES ARE DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH PROJET SERIES
PS4.5 FLIGHT SIMULATOR TRAINING DEVICES AND ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR REAL-WORLD
OPERATIONS OR FOR OPERATING ANY REAL AIRCRAFT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS WARNING
COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.

2 © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL

SECTION 2 – START-UP AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE

SECTION 3 – NORMAL CHECKLIST

SECTION 4 – EMERGENCY EVACUATION CHECKLIST

SECTION 5 – PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES

SECTION 6 – INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS)

SECTION 7 – SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

SECTION 8 – SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT

3 © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

4 © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 Operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number: 2.4 – 10/12/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. EDITIONS AND REVISIONS ..................................................................... 5

2. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................... 7

3. ABBREVIATIONS .................................................................................... 8

4. GENERAL ............................................................................................... 9

5. SIMULATOR IDENTIFICATION .............................................................. 15

6. MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING........................................................... 17

3 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

4 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

1. EDITIONS AND REVISIONS

1.1. List of Editions:

Edition Emission
Published by Notes
No. Date
Head of Flight Operations
2 10/08/2015 Second Edition
and Training

5 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

1.2. List of Revisions:

Section Rev
Rev Date Published by Notes
No. No.
Head of Flight
1 4 10/12/2015
Operations and Training
Head of Flight Addition of Control Loading
2 2 09/11/2015
Operations and Training relates procedures
Head of Flight
3 2 15/11/2015
Operations and Training
Head of Flight
4 1 10/08/2015
Operations and Training
Head of Flight
5 4 10/12/2015
Operations and Training
Head of Flight
6 2 22/09/2015
Operations and Training
Head of Flight
7 1 10/08/2015
Operations and Training
Head of Flight
8 1 10/09/2015
Operations and Training

6 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2. INTRODUCTION

2.1. This manual relates to the Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd ProJet Series PS4.5 FSTD (Flight
Simulator Training Device) with Active Flight Control Loading option. The objective of this
manual is to provide technical information and operating procedures for the PS4.5 FSTD.

2.2. WARNING – THIS MANUAL AND PROCEDURES ARE DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH PROJET
SERIES PS4.5 FLIGHT SIMULATOR TRAINING DEVICES AND ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR
REAL-WORLD OPERATIONS OR FOR OPERATING ANY REAL AIRCRAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.

2.3. The ProJet Series PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual is divided into 7 Sections:

1) Introduction and General


2) Simulator Start-up and Shutdown Checklist
3) Normal Checklist
4) Emergency Evacuation Checklist
5) Pilot Operating Procedures
6) Instructors Operating Station (IOS)
7) Systems Description
8) Simulator Operator Endorsement

2.4. This manual details amplified normal operating procedures in Section 5. For non-normal
checklists (NNCs) and procedures refer to the ProJet Series PS4.5 Quick Reference
Handbook (QRH).

2.5. Simulator Manufacturer:

Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited

Unit 2 / 103 Main South Road,


P.O. Box 6737,
Christchurch,
New Zealand.
Phone: +64 3 343 0864
Website: www.pacificsimulators.com

7 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3. ABBREVIATIONS

AATD Advanced Aviation Training Device


ADF Automatic Direction Finder
AFDS Autopilot Flight Director System
AFE Above Field Elevation
ATIS Aerodrome Terminal Information Service
ATO Approved Testing Officer
BATD Basic Aviation Training Device
CASA Civil Aviation Safety Authority
CDU Control Display Unit
DCT Direct
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DU Display Unit
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FMC Flight Management Computer
FMS Flight Management System
FSTD Flight Simulator Training Device
FTD Flight Training Device
GPS Global Positioning System
HAA Height Above Airport
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
ILS Instrument Landing System
IMC Instrument Meteorological Conditions
JOC Jet Orientation Course
KTS Knots – Nautical Miles per Hour
LLZ Localiser
MCC Multi-Crew Cooperation
MCP Mode Control Panel
MIP Main Instrument Panel
NAA National Aviation Administration
ND Navigation Display
NDB Non Directional Beacon
NM Nautical Miles
PFD Primary Flight Display
PS4.5 Pacific Simulators ProJet Series PS4.5 FSTD
QAG Qualification and Approval Guide
QFE Altimeter setting in reference to Field Elevation of airport
QNH Altimeter setting in reference to local barometric pressure
SID Standard Instrument Departure
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VMC Visual Meteorological Conditions
VOR VHF Omnidirectional Rangefinder

8 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4. GENERAL

4.1. Manufactured by Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd, the ProJet Series PS4.5 is a fixed-base FSTD
(Flight Simulator Training Device) based on a single-aisle, twin engine jet airliner.

4.2. The PS4.5 FSTD is designed for pilot training applications such as Multi-Crew Cooperation
(MCC) Courses, Jet Transition training, Jet Orientation Courses (JOC), systems training,
procedural training and advanced instrument training.

4.3. PS4.5 key features:

• Fixed-base FSTD based on a modern, twin engine, narrow body jet airliner
• Fully enclosed cockpit
• Fully functional aircraft panels, systems, avionics and controls including glass
cockpit instrument displays, Flight Management Computers (FMC), Autopilot Flight
Director System (AFDS), TCAS, weather radar, and EGPWS
• Dual-linked flight controls, rudder pedals and steering tiller
• Motorised throttle quadrant including auto-throttle, speed-brake lever and trim
wheels
• Surround stereo sound system and seat shakers
• High Definition Visual System with a 180° wrap-around curved screen
• Global scenery and navigation database including over 24,000 airports and cities
• Four crew seats including 5-point seat harnesses, headsets and oxygen masks for
the pilot stations
• Touch-screen Instructors Station console with extensive features
• Certification by multiple civil aviation regulatory authorities.

9 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4.4. Circuit Breaker Panels:

• Some PS4.5 FSTD’s are equipped with Circuit Breaker Panels behind the Captain’s
seat (P18 Panel), behind the First Officer’s seat (P6 Panel), and behind the control
stand. These panels are representative of a typical twin-engine jet airliner flight
deck.
• The P6 Panel is on a hinge and can be moved against the rear-right side of the
simulator to give more space. The normal position for the P6 Panel is full extended
behind the First Officer’s Seat. Note: In some devices, the observer seat at the rear-
right of the flight deck must be removed to extend or stow the P6 Panel and then
reinstalled once the panel is locked in position. Follow the instructions on the
placard adjacent to the observer seat.
• Circuit Breaker Panels in PS4.5 FSTDs are non-functional and are designed only to
be checked as part of the Preliminary Preflight Procedure as per the Pilot Operating
Procedures section of this manual. The circuit breakers are not required to be
pulled or used for any normal or non-normal procedure or checklist.

10 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4.5. Transport Delay/Latency:

• The transport delay for the instruments, visual system and flight controls of a PS4.5
FSTD do not exceed 300 milliseconds (ms) and do not exhibit any discernible delay
that affects the realism of the simulated flight characteristics. The following SOC
(Statement of Compliance) can be used for the purposes of FSTD certification:

The industry standard USB 2.0 serial connection has a raw data rate at 480Mbps
and this is the only connection used for all Pacific Simulators PS4.5 FSTD input
devices. Each Pacific Simulators PS4.5 device is polled by the software interfaces
every 50 milliseconds to ensure the device is both responding and meets the
requirements.

Each control input is tested by the IOS when the device is started by PS4.5 device to
ensure the transport delay time or any design parameters is out of original
tolerances. Control inputs are polled by the software interfaces every 50
milliseconds to ensure the device is both responding and meets the requirements.
If the test fails, an error message appears on the IOS identifying the control(s) out
of tolerance, and simulator operation cannot be continued. It the test is successful,
a message will appear stating “Simulation Start – Simulator successful test
conditions”.

EXAMPLE: Throttles have lost connection or outside latency tolerances, the


following will be displayed on the IOS:

All instrumentation and indicators on PS4.5 devices are displayed on high quality
LCD monitors and high quality physical gauges. All indications and displays are
visible during all flight operations, do not appear to be out of focus or illegible, do
not appear to “jump” or “step”, and do not appear with distracting jagged lines or
edges.

11 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4.6. Simulator Exterior:

1) Full Exterior:

2) 3d View (underneath tent):

12 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4.7. Simulator Dimensions:

1) Plan View (dimensions in millimetres mm):

2) Left Elevation (dimensions in millimetres mm):

13 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4.8. Simulator Interior:

1) Flight Deck:

14 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5. SIMULATOR IDENTIFICATION

5.1. Each PS4.5 FSTD is unique and may have some differences. A PS4.5 FSTD can be identified
by the Build Plate and Manufacturer Serial Number (MSN).

5.2. The FSTD Build Plate is normally located on the inside of the Simulator Rear Door and
includes the following information:
1) Series
2) FSTD Model
3) Serial Number
4) Build Date (month and year)

5.3. The device Manufacturer Serial Number (MSN) can be identified using the following key:
MODEL – MODEL GENERATION NUMBER – BUILD DATE – LINE NUMBER

Example:

PS45-3-082015-030
Model: PS4.5
Model Generation Number: 3
Build Date: August 2015
Line Number: 030

15 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

16 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

6. MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

Refer to the PS4.5 Simulator Maintenance Manual for detailed maintenance information including
fault reporting, logging and resolution procedures.

It is important that care is taken when cleaning certain components in the PS4.5 Simulator. Certain
cleaning agents may cause permanent damage to surfaces such as screens and plastic items.

Warning - It is our recommendation that Food and drinks are not consumed in the Simulator. Major
damage is likely to occur if any form of liquid was to come in contact with any electronic
components.

The following is a list of recommended cleaning products that will achieve the best results and help
protect the components in your simulator.

Side and front Windows:


A cleaning product suitable for use on clear acrylic. Please consult your local plastics supplier. Spray
the windows and rub them dry with a non-fluffy cloth. Prevents electric charges and dust attraction.

Cockpit Interior:
It is recommended that you us a soft brush attachment on a vacuum cleaner to remove the majority
of dust and dirt in the cockpit. Be careful around LCD screen and instrument panels not to cause
damage

Computer Screen Surfaces:


Use an approved LCD screen wipes such as Fellows Wet/Dry

Painted Metal Surfaces (eg: Seats, Floors , Glareshield panels)


Use warm damp non-fluff cloth and a non-abrasive cleaner such as Spray and Wipe. Dry completely
using a soft non-fluff cloth or towel.

Fibreglass Surfaces (eg: ceilings, wall linings)


Use warm damp non-fluff cloth and a non-abrasive cleaner such as Spray and Wipe. Dry completely
using a soft non-fluff cloth or towel.

Plastic surfaces (eg: knobs, buttons, face plates)


Use warm damp non-fluff cloth non-abrasive cleaner such as Spray and Wipe. Dry completely using a
soft non-fluff cloth or towel.
The sheep skin seat covers should be dry cleaned only.

17 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Recommended Cleaning Schedule:

Note: The frequency of cleaning required will be determined by the level of usage and the
environment that the Simulators is in. The below recommendations are based on a 12 hours per day,
seven day a week operation.

Daily:
• Vacuum
o Floor, around Control Columns and Rudder Pedals.
o All LCD screens, Main Front Instrument Panel
• Clean
o Yoke heads, Thrust lever Knobs and Headsets
o Centre console (Radios), Instructor Station Screen and Keyboard
Weekly:
• Clean
o All windows, all Main Instrument Panels, All Overhead Panels, Ceiling Panels, Wall
linings and Fiberglass fairings.

Simulator Faults and Maintenance:

If a simulator fault occurs, refer to the PS4.5 Simulator Maintenance Manual.

Typically, restarting the simulator will resolve most faults.

For emergency support, call the 24 hour support phone number listed in the PS4.5 Simulator
Maintenance Manual.

18 GENERAL © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 Operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

SECTION 2 –
START-UP AND SHUTDOWN
PROCEDURE
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number: 2.2 – 09/11/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 START-UP AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PS4.5 SIMULATOR START UP PROCEDURE


1. PC Rack.…………….check Sim-Server PC is ON and all other PCs are OFF

2. Control Loading Power switch……………………………………..……………….ON

3. Simulator Main Power switch………………………..…………………………....ON

4. Projectors……………………………………………………….………………………..START
Warning: Projectors must be ON before completing Step 6

5. Control Loading RESET button……………………………………………….....PUSH


Warning: Ensure Flight Controls are centred before completing this step

6. Simulator Red Start button………………………………………………....…..PUSH

WHEN SIMULATOR HAS STARTED (IOS TESTS COMPLETE):


7. IOS Control Loading……………………………………………………………………...ON
Warning: Ensure Flight Controls are free from obstruction

8. BATTERY switch…………………………………………………………………………...ON

9. APU………………………………………………………………………START & on busses


When the APU GEN OFF light illuminates:
APU GENERATOR bus switches – ON

10. IRS mode selectors.........................................................................NAV

11. CDU………………………………………………..Initialise FMC – SET IRS POSITION

12. IOS Malfunctions………………………………………………………….Clear Failures


Check that all display screens are on and IRS alignment complete

13. Cockpit Lights…………………...………...………………....………………………….Test


Master LIGHTS TEST and DIM switch – TEST
Verify all lights are illuminated, then – BRT
14. STAB TRIM……..Check Trim Wheels and Pointers for correct operation

15. Switches & Rotaries.….Check MCP and Pedestal for correct operation

16. Engines (both)..............................................................................CHECK


SEE OVER PAGE

3 START-UP AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

16. Engines (both)..............................................................................CHECK


FUEL PUMP switches – ON
PACK switches – OFF
ISOLATION VALVE switch – OPEN
APU BLEED Air switch – ON
Start both Engines and ensure operating normally
OPTIONAL:
Shutdown both Engines
FUEL PUMP switches – SET

PS4.5 SIMULATOR SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE

1. Complete the SECURE and ELECTRICAL POWER DOWN PROCEDURE


(Detailed in Pilot Operating Procedures Section of the Simulator Operations Manual)

2. IOS………………………………………………………………………………....SHUTDOWN

3. Simulator Main Power switch………………………………………………………OFF

4. Control Loading Power switch………………………………..……………………OFF

5. PC Rack…..check that all PCs have shutdown except for Sim-Server PC

6. Projectors………….……….confirm automatic shutdown after 10 minutes

4 START-UP AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 Operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

SECTION 3 –
NORMAL CHECKLIST
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number: 2.2 – 15/11/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 NORMAL CHECKLIST © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


NORMAL CHECKLIST (PS4.5)

PRE-FLIGHT BEFORE TAXI


Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tested, 100% (B) Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On (F)

NAVIGATION transfer & DISPLAY Probe Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On (F)


switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL, AUTO (F)
Anti-ice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._____ (F)
Window Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On (F)
Isolation Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO (F)
Pressurisation Mode Selector. . . . AUTO (F)
ENGINE START switches. . . . . . . . CONT (F)
Flight Instruments. . . . . . .Heading_____ (B)
Altimeter_____ Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Checked (B)

Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Set (C) Autobrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTO (F)

Engine Start Levers. . . . . . . . . . CUTOFF (C) Engine Start Levers . . . . . . . IDLE detent (C)

Flight Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked (C)


BEFORE START Ground Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear (B)
Flight Deck Door. . . . . .Closed & Locked (F)

Fuel. . . . . . . . . .______ KGS, PUMPS ON (F) BEFORE TAKEOFF

Passenger Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On (F) Flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___, Green light (C)

Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locked (B) Stabilizer Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___ Units (C)

MCP. . . . . . . .V2____ HDG____ ALT____ (C)


AFTER TAKEOFF
Takeoff Speeds. .V1____ VR____ V2____(B)
Engine Bleeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON (PM)
CDU pre-flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . Completed (B)
Packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO (PM)
Rudder and Aileron Trim. . . . Free and 0 (C)
Landing Gear. . . . . . . . . . . UP and OFF (PM)
Taxi and Takeoff briefing. . . .Completed (C)
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UP, No lights (PM)
ANTI COLLISION light. . . . . . . . . . . . . ON (F)

Page 1 of 2 © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd November 15, 2015


NORMAL CHECKLIST (PS4.5)

DESCENT SHUTDOWN
Pressurization. . . . . . . .LAND ALT____ (PM) Fuel Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off (F)

Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Checked (B) Probe Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off (F)

Autobrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ____ (PM) Hydraulic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set (F)

Landing Data. .VREF___ Minimums____ (B) Flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up (F)

Approach Briefing. . . . . . . . .Completed (PF) Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ______ (C)

Engine Start Levers. . . . . . . . . . CUTOFF (C)

APPROACH Weather Radar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off (F)

Altimeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .____ (B)

SECURE
IRSs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off (F)
LANDING
Emergency Exit Lights. . . . . . . . . . . .OFF (F)
ENGINE START switches. . . . . . . CONT (PF)
Window Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off (F)
Speedbrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Armed (PF)
Packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off (F)
Landing Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down (PF)

Flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .___, Green light (PF)

Page 2 of 2 © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd November 15, 2015


Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 Operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

SECTION 4 – EMERGENCY
EVACUATION CHECKLIST
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number: 2.1 – 10/08/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 EMERGENCY EVACUATION CHECKLIST © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

EMERGENCY EVACUATION PROCEDURES


PS4.5 FSTD

FIRE PRECAUTIONS

• 1 x Fire Extinguisher is located at the inside rear of the device.


• Smoke Sensors and Alarms are located outside the device.
• In the event of a requirement to evacuate the device, follow the evacuation procedures
described below:

EVACUATION PROCEDURE

(MUST BE DISPLAYED ON INSIDE OF SIMULATOR FLIGHT DECK DOOR)

In the event that the Simulator must be evacuated, the following procedure should be
followed under the direction of the Simulator Operator:

1 Front Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Extreme Rear

2 Harnesses and Headsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove

3 If Time Permits:
Simulator (IOS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown
Main Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off

4 Evacuate Simulator via Exit Door at rear of Simulator.

5 Simulator door should be left open/ajar.

6 In the event of a fire, appropriate fire equipment installed should be used to


assist a safe evacuation.

7 Follow the respective Emergency Response Procedure* for the facility where
the simulator is located.

8 Contact appropriate personnel** as required

*It is the responsibility of the operator to obtain and display the Emergency Response Procedures for the
specific location of the Simulator.

**Personnel should include appropriate Emergency Services and Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd.

3 EMERGENCY EVACUATION CHECKLIST © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

EMERGENCY EXIT

There is only one entry and exit door in the simulator, the main Entry/Exit door.

Warning
It is the responsibility of the operator to alert the occupants of the simulator to any
external emergency so that the occupants can safely exit the simulator without injury.

4 EMERGENCY EVACUATION CHECKLIST © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

SECTION 5 –
PILOT OPERATING
PROCEDURES
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number: 2.4 – 10/12/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................... 5

COMPANY SOPS ........................................................................................ 11

BRIEFINGS ................................................................................................. 15

CALLOUTS AND STANDARD PHRASEOLOGY .............................................. 17

NORMAL CHECKLIST ................................................................................. 25

SCAN FLOW AND AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY ............................................ 31

AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES INTRODUCTION ................................................ 35

SIMULATOR SET-UP .................................................................................. 39

ELECTRICAL POWER UP PROCEDURE ........................................................ 41

PRELIMINARY PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE - CAPTAIN OR FIRST OFFICER ....... 45

CDU PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE - CAPTAIN OR FIRST OFFICER ...................... 49

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE - FIRST OFFICER .................................................. 53

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE - CAPTAIN ........................................................... 63

BEFORE START PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 69

PUSHBACK OR TOWING PROCEDURE........................................................ 72

ENGINE START PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 73

BEFORE TAXI PROCEDURE......................................................................... 75

TAXI PROCEDURE ...................................................................................... 77

BEFORE TAKEOFF PROCEDURE.................................................................. 77

3 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TAKEOFF PROCEDURE [VNAV NOT ARMED FOR TAKEOFF] ....................... 79

TAKEOFF PROCEDURE [VNAV ARMED FOR TAKEOFF] ............................... 83

TAKEOFF FLAP RETRACTION SCHEDULE .................................................... 86

CLIMB AND CRUISE PROCEDURE ............................................................... 87

DESCENT PROCEDURE............................................................................... 89

APPROACH PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 91

FLAP EXTENSION SCHEDULE ..................................................................... 92

LANDING PROCEDURE - ILS OR GLS APPROACH [STANDARD] ................... 93

LANDING PROCEDURE - ILS OR GLS APPROACH [LOW DRAG] ................... 97

LANDING PROCEDURE - VNAV APPROACH.............................................. 101

LANDING PROCEDURE - CIRCUITS AND TOUCH AND GO ......................... 105

GO-AROUND AND MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE ............................... 109

LANDING ROLL PROCEDURE ................................................................... 111

AFTER LANDING PROCEDURE.................................................................. 113

SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE........................................................................ 115

SECURE PROCEDURE ............................................................................... 117

ELECTRICAL POWER DOWN PROCEDURE ................................................ 117

NON-NORMAL PROCEDURES .................................................................. 119

PERFORMANCE INFLIGHT ....................................................................... 121

WEIGHT AND BALANCE CHART ............................................................... 125

4 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LIMITATIONS

Airplane General
Operational Limitations
Runway slope +/– 2%
Maximum Takeoff and Landing Tailwind 15 knots
Component
Note: The capability of the airplane(s) has
been satisfactorily demonstrated for takeoff
and manual landing with tailwinds up to 15
knots.
Note: Airplanes operating under FAA Rules:
This finding does not constitute operational
approval to conduct takeoffs or landings with
tailwind components greater than 10 knots.
Observe gear and flap
Maximum speeds
placards
Maximum Operating Altitude 41,000ft
Maximum Takeoff and Landing Altitude 8,400ft

Maximum flight operating latitude – 82° North and 82° South, except for
the region between 80° West and 130 ° West longitude, the maximum
flight operating latitude is 70° North, and the region between 120° East
and 160° East longitude, the maximum flight operating latitude is 60°
South.

5 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Crosswind Guidelines
Note: The maximum demonstrated takeoff and landing crosswind is 33
knots.
Takeoff
Runway Condition Crosswind Component (knots)
Dry 34
Wet 25
Standing Water/Slush 15
Snow - No Melting 25
Ice - No Melting 15

Landing
Runway Condition Crosswind Component (knots)
Dry 40
Wet 40
Standing Water/Slush 20
Snow - No Melting 35
Ice - No Melting 17

6 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Altitude Display Limits for RVSM Operations


Standby altimeters do not meet altimeter accuracy requirements of RVSM
airspace.
The maximum allowable in-flight difference between Captain and First
Officer altitude displays for RVSM operations is 200 feet.
The maximum allowable on-the-ground altitude display differences for
RVSM operations are:
Field Elevation Max Difference Max Difference Between
Between Captain & Captain or F/O & Field
F/O Elevation
Sea Level to 5,000
50 feet 75 feet
feet
5,001 to 10,000
60 feet 75 feet
feet

Weight Limitations
Operating Empty Weight: 41,145kg / 90,700lb
Max Takeoff Weight (MTOW): 79,015kg / 174,200lb
Max Landing Weight (MLW): 66,316kg / 146,300lb
Max Zero Fuel Weight (MZFW): 61,688kg / 136,000lb

7 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Air Systems
Pressurization
• The maximum cabin differential pressure (relief valves) is 9.1 psi.
• With engine bleed air switches ON, do not operate the air
conditioning packs in HIGH for takeoff, approach or landing.
Note: The fire protection Non-Normal procedures takes
precedence over the statement regarding no air conditioning pack
in HIGH during takeoff, approach, or landing. The CARGO FIRE and
SMOKE/ FUMES REMOVAL checklists require the Operating PACK
switch(es) HIGH. Switch(es) need to be placed in HIGH in order to
increase ventilation for smoke removal.

Autopilot/Flight Director System


• Use of aileron trim with the autopilot engaged is prohibited.
• Do not engage the autopilot for takeoff below 400 feet AGL.
• Aircraft operating under FAA Rules:
o For single channel operation during approach, the
autopilot shall not remain engaged below 50 feet AGL.
o Maximum allowable wind speeds when landing weather
minima are predicated on autoland operations:
 Headwind 25 knots
 Crosswind 20 knots
 Tailwind 15 knots.
• Maximum and minimum glideslope angles for autoland are 3.25
degrees and 2.5 degrees respectively.
• Autoland capability may only be used with flaps 30 or 40 and both
engines operative.

8 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Engines and APU


Engine Limit Display Markings
• Maximum and minimum limits are red.
• Caution limits are amber.

Engine Ignition
• Engine ignition must be on for:
o Takeoff
o Landing
o Operation in heavy rain
o Anti-ice operation.

Reverse Thrust
• Intentional selection of reverse thrust inflight is prohibited.

APU
• Aircraft operating under FAA Rules: Inflight - APU bleed + electrical
load: max alt 10,000 ft.
• Aircraft operating under FAA Rules: Ground only - APU bleed +
electrical load: max alt 15,000 ft.
• APU bleed: max alt 17,000 ft.
• APU electrical load: max alt 41,000 ft.

Flight Controls
• Max flap extension altitude is 20,000 ft.
• Holding in icing conditions with flaps extended is prohibited.
• In flight, do not extend the SPEED BRAKE lever beyond the FLIGHT
DETENT.
• Avoid rapid and large alternating control inputs, especially in

9 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

combination with large changes in pitch, roll, or yaw (e.g. large


side slip angles) as they may result in structural failure at any
speed, including below VA.

Flight Management, Navigation


Air Data Inertial Reference Unit (ADIRU)
• ADIRU alignment must not be attempted at latitudes greater than
78 degrees 15 minutes.

Fuel System
• Maximum tank fuel temperature is 49°C.
• Minimum tank fuel temperature prior to takeoff and inflight is -
43°C, or 3°C above the fuel freezing point temperature, whichever
is higher.
Note: The use of Fuel System Icing Inhibitor additives does not
change the minimum fuel tank temperature limit.
• Intentional dry running of a center tank fuel pump (low pressure
light illuminated) is prohibited.

Fuel Balance
• Lateral imbalance between main tanks 1 and 2 must be scheduled
to be zero. Random fuel imbalance must not exceed 453kgs for
taxi, takeoff, flight or landing.

Fuel Loading
• Main tanks 1 and 2 must be full if center tank contains more than
453kgs.

Landing Gear
• Operation with assumed temperature reduced takeoff thrust is
not permitted with anti-skid inoperative.

10 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

COMPANY SOPS
Handover and Takeover Procedures
(a) Handover of control from one pilot to another must always be
conducted in a positive manner. To minimise confusion or
operational risk, the PF must not relinquish control until the PM
has advised that he/she has taken control of the aircraft.
(b) The standard phraseology to be used for handover/takeover
procedures is: “You have control” and “I have control”.
(c) When handing over control when the autopilot is engaged, the PF
should readout the AFDS status and FMAs before handing over
control. The crew member taking control should also readout the
AFDS status and FMAs and engage the autopilot on their side (the
captain will use CMD ‘A’ and the F/O will use CMD ‘B’). This
procedure ensures that both crew members are aware of the
automation status and the CMD engaged provides a visual cue for
who is PF.

Automatic Flight Monitoring


(a) During automatic flight the PF should guard the flight controls and
thrust levers whenever the aircraft is below 2500ft AGL as
indicated by the radio altimeter. The PF shall at all times be
prepared to revert to manual control if required.

FMA Changes
(a) The PF must readout all FMA changes for both manual flight and
automatic flight, except for during the takeoff and initial climb
procedure when the aircraft is below 400ft AGL as indicated on
the radio altimeter. The PM should respond with “Checked”.

11 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CDU/FMC Management
Flight Phase Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring
Takeoff Takeoff Ref LEGS
Climb Climb Progress Page 1
Cruise Cruise Progress Page 1
Descent Descent Progress Page 1
Landing Approach Ref Progress Page 2

Clocks Management
Elapsed Time (ET)
CAPTAIN FIRST OFFICER
START Block Off Push TO/GA
HOLD Block On Reverser Stowed
MEANING Block Time Flight Time

Chrono/Stopwatch
CAPTAIN FIRST OFFICER
ENGINE Start Lever to Idle START VALVE OPEN
START (10 seconds for EGT rise) (2 minutes max illuminated)
BEFORE Engine Warm Up
N/A
TAXI (2 minutes)
AFTER Engine Cool Down
N/A
LANDING (3 minutes)

12 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CDU Data
The following CDU data can be used for operating the PS4.5 FSTD:

• FMC COST Index (CI):


As per flight plan or 15 (if not stated)

• Normal Thrust Reduction Altitude (T/R ALT):


1,000ft AFE

• Normal Acceleration Altitude (ACC ALT):


1,000ft AFE

• Normal Engine Out Acceleration Altitude (EO ACC):


800ft AFE

Cabin Notifications

• Cycle FASTEN-BELTS Sign OFF and ON to secure the cabin:


i. When entering the runway before Take-off;
ii. On approach through 5,000ft AFE or if in adverse weather
conditions (whichever comes first).

• PA NOTIFICATIONS:
i. Descending through 20,000ft AFE –
“CABIN CREW, PREPARE THE CABIN FOR LANDING”;
ii. Arriving at the gate –
“CABIN CREW, DISARM DOORS AND CROSS-CHECK”.

13 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

External Lighting Procedure


 On * Night/low light conditions

14 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

BRIEFINGS
The following can be used as templates for the Departure and Approach
Briefings:

Departure Briefing (Pilot Flying):


This briefing should be conducted by the Pilot Flying prior to pushback and
engine start and should follow below acrostic (C-TWO-Plus):

C - Chart
• From AD Chart: Chart ID/Date and pertinent notes, taxi briefing;
• From FMS: Runway, name of SID/Departure/Transition;
• From SID Chart: Chart ID/Date and pertinent notes, SID briefing.

T - Terrain
• Relevant MSA(s).

W - Weather
• Relevant weather or Adverse Weather;
• QNH/Altimeters Cross Check.

O - Operational
• Relevant operational considerations;
• Flap and thrust setting for takeoff;
• Brief Non-normal Takeoff Procedure
(Stop for anything prior to 80kts. Stop only for Engine Fire, Engine
Failure, Predictive Windshear, or aircraft unsafe and unable to fly
before V1. After V1 continue, no actions to be done below 400ft
apart from cancel the warnings and gear up. Follow relevant CDP).

P - Plus
• Any other relevant Threats.

15 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Approach Briefing (Pilot Flying):


The Approach Briefing is conducted by the Pilot Flying before the start of
an instrument approach. This is typically conducted prior to Top of
Descent and should follow below acrostic (C-TWO-Plus):

C - Chart
• From FMS: Name of STAR, type of Approach and Runway;
• From Charts: Chart IDs/effective Dates and pertinent notes,
STAR/Approach briefing, aerodrome chart and taxi-in briefing;
• DME height checks, MDA/DH;
• Missed approach procedure;
• Primary navigation aids for approach.

T - Terrain
• Relevant MSA(s);
• Aerodrome Elevation.

W - Weather
• Relevant weather or Adverse Weather.

O - Operational
• Relevant operational considerations;
• Fuel at destination and Alternate fuel (if applicable)
• Braking considerations
• Automation (plan for use and when it will be disconnected)

P - Plus
• Any other relevant Threats.

16 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CALLOUTS AND STANDARD PHRASEOLOGY


Both crewmembers should be aware of altitude, aircraft position and
situation.
Avoid nonessential conversation during critical phases of flight,
particularly during taxi, takeoff, approach and landing. Unnecessary
conversation reduces crew efficiency and alertness and is not
recommended when below 10,000 feet MSL / FL100. At high altitude
airports, adjust this altitude upward, as required.
Recommended callouts are provided in the interest of good Crew
Resource Management. These callouts may be modified by the operator.
Recommended callouts differ from procedural callouts. Procedural
callouts are required. Some procedural callouts are also listed in the
recommended callouts in this section.
The Pilot Monitoring (PM) makes callouts based on instrument indications
or observations for the appropriate condition. The Pilot Flying (PF) should
verify the condition/location from the flight instruments and
acknowledge. If the PM does not make the required callout, the PF should
make it.
The PM calls out significant deviations from command airspeed or flight
path. Either pilot should call out any abnormal indications of the flight
instruments (flags, loss of deviation pointers, etc.).
One of the basic fundamentals of Crew Resource Management is that each
crewmember must be able to supplement or act as a back-up for the other
crewmember. Proper adherence to recommended callouts is an essential
element of a well-managed flight deck. These callouts provide both
crewmembers required information about aircraft systems and about the
participation of the other crewmember. The absence of a callout at the
appropriate time may indicate a malfunction of an aircraft system or
indication, or indicate the possibility of incapacitation of the other pilot.
The PF should acknowledge all GPWS voice callouts during approach
except altitude callouts while below 500 feet AFE. The recommended
callout of “CONTINUE” or “GO-AROUND” at minimums is not considered

17 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

an altitude callout and should always be made. If the automatic electronic


voice callout is not heard by the flight crew, the PM should make the
callout.
Note: If automatic callouts are not available, the PM may call out radio
altitude at 100 feet, 50 feet and 30 feet (or other values as
required) to aid in developing an awareness of eye height at
touchdown.

The standard acknowledgment to any automated callout, or response to a


callout made by the other pilot, unless specified, is “CHECKED”.

18 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Standard Callouts - Inflight

CALLOUT
CONDITION / LOCATION (PM, UNLESS NOTED)
Climb 1,000 ft above/below “1,000 TO LEVEL”
And assigned altitude/Flight Level
Descent
Approaching Transition PM: “TRANSITION”
Altitude
PF: “SET STANDARD”
Climb PM: “STANDARD SET,
PASSING FL ____, NOW”
PF: “CHECKED”
When established at final PF: “MAINTAINING FL ____,
Cruise cruise level (check of all ON STANDARD”
three altimeters and MCP)
PM: “CHECKED”

Approaching Transition Level PM: “TRANSITION”


PF: “SET ____”
PM: “____ SET, PASSING
Descent ____ FEET, NOW”
PF: “CHECKED”
10,000 ft MSL / FL100 PM: “10,000 / FL100”
(Reduce airspeed if required)
PF: “CHECKED”

19 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Standard Callouts - ILS or GLS Approach

CALLOUT
CONDITION / LOCATION
(PM, UNLESS NOTED)
First positive inward motion of “LOCALIZER ALIVE”
localizer pointer
First positive motion of Glide Slope “GLIDE SLOPE ALIVE”
pointer
Final approach fix inbound “OUTER MARKER/FAF, HEIGHT
CHECKED, MISSED APPROACH
ALTITUDE SET”
1,000 ft. AFE “1,000”
500 ft. AFE (Check autoland status “500” (F/D or single autopilot
annunciator, if applicable) approach)
Autoland status “FLARE ARMED”
(Autoland callout only)
Autoland status “LAND 2 or LAND 3
or NO AUTOLAND”
100 ft. above DA(H) (fail passive “APPROACHING MINIMUMS”
airplanes)
Individual sequence flasher lights “STROBE LIGHTS”
visible
At AH (fail operational airplanes) - “ALERT HEIGHT”
check autoland status annunciator

At DA(H) with individual approach “MINIMUMS - APPROACH LIGHTS /


light bars visible RED BARS” (if installed)
At DA(H) - Suitable visual reference PF: “CONTINUE”
established, i.e., PM calls visual
cues

20 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CALLOUT
CONDITION / LOCATION
(PM, UNLESS NOTED)
At DA(H) - Suitable visual reference PF: “GO AROUND”
not established, i.e., PM does not
call any visual cues or only strobe
lights
At minimums callout - If no “I HAVE CONTROL______” (state
response from PF intentions)
Below DA(H) - Suitable visual “THRESHOLD/RUNWAY
reference established TOUCHDOWN ZONE”
Below DA(H) - Suitable visual PF: “LANDING”
reference established
Below DA(H) - Suitable visual PF: “GO AROUND”
reference not established, i.e., PM
does not call any visual cues

21 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Standard Callouts – Non-ILS or Non-GLS Approach

CALLOUT
CONDITION / LOCATION
(PM, UNLESS NOTED)
First positive inward motion of VOR “COURSE/LOCALIZER ALIVE”
or LOC course deviation indication
Final approach fix inbound “OUTER MARKER/FAF, HEIGHT
CHECKED, MISSED APPROACH
ALTITUDE SET”
1,000 ft. AFE “1,000”
500 ft. AFE “500”
100 ft. above DA(H) or MDA(H) “APPROACHING MINIMUMS”
Individual sequence flasher lights “STROBE LIGHTS”
visible
At DA(H) or MDA(H) with individual “MINIMUMS - APPROACH LIGHTS /
approach light bars visible RED BARS” (if installed)
At DA(H) or MDA(H) - Suitable PF: “CONTINUE”
visual reference established, i.e.,
PM calls visual cues
At DA(H) or MDA(H)- Suitable visual PF: “GO AROUND”
reference not established, i.e., PM
does not call visual cues
At minimums callout - If no “I HAVE CONTROL______” (state
response from PF intentions)
Below DA(H) or MDA(H)- Suitable “THRESHOLD/RUNWAY
visual reference established TOUCHDOWN ZONE”
Below DA(H) or MDA(H)- Suitable PF: “LANDING”
visual reference established
Below DA (H) or MDA(H)- Suitable PF: “GO AROUND”
visual reference not established

22 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Standard Phraseology
A partial list of standardised words and phrases follows:
Thrust:
• “SET TAKEOFF THRUST”
• “SET GO-AROUND THRUST”
• “SET MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS THRUST”
• “SET CLIMB THRUST”
• “SET CRUISE THRUST”
Flap Settings:
• “FLAPS UP”
• “FLAPS ONE”
• “FLAPS FIVE”
• “FLAPS TEN”
• “FLAPS FIFTEEN”
• “FLAPS TWENTY-FIVE”
• “FLAPS THIRTY”
• “FLAPS FORTY”
Airspeed:
• “80 KNOTS”
• “V1”
• “ROTATE”
• “SET_____KNOTS”
• “SET VREF PLUS (additive)”
• “SET FLAPS_____SPEED”
• “60 KNOTS”

Procedures:
• “BEFORE START PROCEDURE”
• “ENGINE START PROCEDURE”
• “RUNWAY ENTRY PROCEDURE”

23 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Exceedance Callouts
When the aircraft is flown outside exceedance limits, the PM shall provide
advisory calls. The limits are not tolerances but are parameters beyond
which sustained flight should not be accepted without corrective action
being taken by the PF. Exceedance callouts are required as set out in the
following table.

PHASE OF FLIGHT CALLOUT (PM) CALLOUT (PF)


Below 500 ft AFE with sink rate >
“SINK RATE” “CHECKED”
1,000 ft/min
In level flight ± 100 ft “ALTITUDE” “CHECKED”
Airspeed + 10/- 5 knots from desired “SPEED” “CHECKED”
Localiser tracking: ½ scale or full
“LOCALIZER” “CHECKED”
scale on expanded scale
VOR tracking: course bar > one dot “TRACKING” “CHECKED”
NDB tracking: > 5º “TRACKING” “CHECKED”
RNAV Approach: ½ limit “TRACKING” “CHECKED”
RNAV Approach: limit “TRACKING
“CHECKED”
LIMIT”
Glideslope: one dot high/low “GLIDESLOPE” “CHECKED”
PAPI/VASI: high/low “PAPI”/“VASI” “CHECKED”
Instrument Warning Flag “_____ FLAG” “CHECKED”

24 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

NORMAL CHECKLIST
Normal Checklists are used after doing all respective procedural items.

The following table shows which pilot calls for the checklist and which
pilot reads the checklist. Both pilots visually verify that each item is in the
needed configuration or that the step is done. The far right column shows
which pilot gives the response. This is different than the normal
procedures where the far right column can show which pilot does the
step.

KEY
C = Captain
F/O = First Officer
PF = Pilot Flying
PM = Pilot Monitoring
AOR = Area of Responsibility

Checklist Call Read Verify Respond


PREFLIGHT C F/O Both AOR
BEFORE START C F/O Both AOR
BEFORE TAXI C F/O Both AOR
BEFORE TAKEOFF C F/O Both AOR
AFTER TAKEOFF PF PM Both AOR
DESCENT PF PM Both AOR
APPROACH PF PM Both AOR
LANDING PF PM Both PF
SHUTDOWN C F/O Both AOR
SECURE C F/O Both AOR

A printed version of the Normal Checklist is kept in the Glare shield Tray.
The Normal Checklist is on the following pages:

25 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PRE-FLIGHT
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tested, 100% B
NAVIGATION transfer & DISPLAY
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL, AUTO F/O
Window Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On F/O
Pressurisation Mode Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AUTO F/O
Flight Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Heading_____ B
Altimeter_____
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set C
Engine Start Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUTOFF C

BEFORE START
Flight Deck Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Closed & Locked F/O
Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ______ KGS, PUMPS ON F/O
Passenger Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On F/O
Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Locked B
MCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2____ HDG____ ALT____ C
Takeoff Speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V1____ VR____ V2____ B
CDU pre-flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completed B
Rudder and Aileron Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Free and 0 C
Taxi and Takeoff briefing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completed C
ANTI COLLISION light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON F/O

26 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

BEFORE TAXI
Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On F/O
Probe Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On F/O
Anti-ice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _____ F/O
Isolation Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO F/O
ENGINE START switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONT F/O
Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked B
Autobrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTO F/O
Engine Start Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IDLE detent C
Flight Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Checked C
Ground Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear B

BEFORE TAKE OFF


Flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .___, Green light C
Stabilizer Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___ Units C

AFTER TAKE OFF


Engine Bleeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ON PM
Packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AUTO PM
Landing Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UP and OFF PM
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UP, No lights PM

27 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

DESCENT
Pressurization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LAND ALT____ PM
Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked B
Autobrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ____ PM
Landing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VREF___ Minimums____ B
Approach Briefing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Completed PF

APPROACH
Altimeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ____ B

LANDING
ENGINE START switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONT PF
Speedbrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armed PF
Landing Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down PF
Flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___, Green light PF

SHUTDOWN
Fuel Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off F/O
Probe Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off F/O
Hydraulic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Set F/O
Flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up F/O
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .______ C
Engine Start Levers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CUTOFF C
Weather Radar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off F/O

28 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SECURE
IRSs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off F/O
Emergency Exit Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off F/O
Window Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off F/O
Packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off F/O

29 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

30 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SCAN FLOW AND AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY


Preflight and Postflight Scan Flow

31 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Areas of Responsibility - Captain as Pilot Flying or Taxiing

32 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Areas of Responsibility - First Officer as Pilot Flying or Taxiing

33 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Scan Flow – Single Pilot Operations

If the simulator is being used in a single pilot operation then the below
scan is recomened:

Scan Pattern – Starting at the Aft Overhead


• Across the Aft Overhead panel from left to right
• Down each panel of the Forward Overhead from left to right
• Across the bottom of the Forward Overhead from left to right
• Across the Glareshield from Left to Right
• Across the Main Instrument Panel from left to right
• Down the Throttle Quadrant
• Down the Pedestal panels from left to right

Overhead Panel switch positions are typically either, 12 O’clock, AUTO or


NORMAL.

34 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

NORMAL PROCEDURES –
AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES FOR PILOTS
PROJET SERIES PS4.5 FSTD
CAUTION: THESE PROCEDURES ARE FOR PACIFIC SIMULATORS PROJET
SERIES PS4.5 FSTDS ONLY AND MUST NOT BE USED FOR REAL-WORLD
OPERATIONS TO OPERATE ANY TYPE OF AIRCRAFT.

AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES INTRODUCTION


General
This section of the PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual details the normal
operating procedures for pilots. The procedures are designed for multi-
crew (two pilot) operations, but may also be used for single pilot
operations. The content of this section of the manual is used to form the
PS4.5 Flight Crew Operations Manual (FCOM).

The procedures are completed by memory and scan flow. For each phase
of flight, a set sequence of scans, procedures and checklists need to be
completed, to ensure that the aircraft systems are set. A scan is a visual
review of the relevant instrument panels and controls, with setting of
controls and switches where required. The scan flow sequence may be
changed as needed.

At the end of each phase, scans and procedures may be followed by a


Checklist to ensure that essential switching has been completed. Scans
and Procedures need to be memorised while Checklists are always read.

Normal procedures are broken into the following different flight phases:
• Preflight • After Takeoff • Shutdown
• Before Start • Descent • Secure
• Before Taxi • Approach
• Before Takeoff • Landing

35 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Crew Duties
For multi-crew operations, the preflight and postflight duties are divided
between the Captain (C) and First Officer (F/O). Phase of flight duties are
divided between the Pilot Flying (PF) and the Pilot Monitoring (PM).

Each crewmember is responsible for moving the controls and switches in


their area of responsibility. The captain may direct actions outside of the
crewmember’s area of responsibility.

The general PF phase of flight responsibilities are:


• Taxiing
• Flight path and airspeed control
• Aircraft configuration
• Navigation

The general PM phase of flight responsibilities are:


• Checklist reading
• Communications
• Tasks asked for by the PF
• Monitoring taxing, flight path, airspeed, airplane configuration and
navigation

The PF and PM duties may change during a flight. For example, the captain
could be the PF during taxi but be the PM during takeoff through to
landing.

Normal procedures show who should complete each procedure according


to the key in the procedure title, or in the far right column, or in the
column heading of a table. The following key can be used:
• C – Captain
• F/O – First Officer
• PF – Pilot Flying
• PM – Pilot Monitoring
• B – Both pilots

36 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

The mode control panel (MCP) is the PF’s responsibility. When flying
manually, the PF directs the PM to make the changes on the MCP.

The captain is the final authority for all tasks directed and done.

For single-pilot operations, the pilot should assume all duties for the
captain and first officer, and for the PF and PM.

Control Display Unit (CDU) Procedures


Before taxi, the captain or first officer may make CDU entries. The other
pilot must verify the entries.

In flight, the PM usually makes the CDU entries. The PF may also make
simple CDU entries when workload allows. The pilot making the entries
should only execute changes after the other pilot verifies the entries.

Key
The following can be used as a key for the amplified pilot procedures:

SCAN FLOW PROCEDURE MEMORY ITEMS

NORMAL CHECKLISTS

AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL PROMPTS

37 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

38 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SIMULATOR SET-UP
The Simulator Set-up procedures assume the Simulator Start-up Procedure
in Section 2 of this manual has been completed.

Instructors Operating Station (IOS) Set-up

SAVED SITUATION………………………………………………………………………….Set, OR:


AIRPORT...................................Set desired Airport, Gate or Runway
POSITION...............................................................SLEW as required
TIME........................................................................Set Time/Month
WEATHER....................................Load WX Theme or set new WX as desired
ATIS............................................................................................................Set
FUEL and WEIGHT......................................................................................Set
Services....................................................................................Set as needed
Eyepoint……………………………………………………………………………...………………..Set
Malfunctions…………………………………...…………………...……………………………Clear
MAP................................................................................................NEW MAP

Simulator Preparation

Simulator.................................................................................Clean and Tidy


Seat harnesses………………………………………………………………………………..Stowed
Headsets…………………………………………………………………………………………Stowed
DOME/MAP lights......................................................................................Set
Air Conditioning…………………………………………………………………………………….ON

39 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

40 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ELECTRICAL POWER UP PROCEDURE


BATTERY switch....................................................................Guard closed
Note: Do not move the airplane until Integrated Standby Flight
Display (ISFD) alignment is complete.
STANDBY POWER switch ........................................................... Guard closed
ALTERNATE FLAPS master switch .............................................. Guard closed
Windshield WIPER selector(s) ............................................................... PARK
ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC PUMPS switches ................................................... OFF
LANDING GEAR lever ...............................................................................DN
Verify that the green landing gear indicator lights are illuminated.
Verify that the red landing gear indicator lights are extinguished.
If external power is needed:
Verify that the GRD POWER AVAILABLE light is illuminated.
GRD POWER switch – ON
Verify that the SOURCE OFF lights are extinguished.
Verify that the TRANSFER BUS OFF lights are extinguished.
Verify that the STANDBY PWR OFF light is extinguished.

Note: Prior to APU operation a fire test must be conducted to


ascertain the serviceability of the fire detection system for the APU.

If APU power is needed:


Verify that the engine No. 1, APU and the engine No. 2 fire switches
are in.
Alert ground personnel before the following test is accomplished.

41 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

OVERHEAT DETECTOR switches – NORMAL


TEST switch – Hold to FAULT/INOP
Verify that the MASTER CAUTION lights are illuminated.
Verify that the OVHT/DET annunciator is illuminated.
Verify that the FAULT light is illuminated.
If the FAULT light fails to illuminate, the fault monitoring
system is inoperative.
Verify that the APU DET INOP light is illuminated.
Do not operate the APU if the APU DET INOP light fails to
illuminate.
TEST switch – Hold to OVHT/FIRE
Verify that the fire warning bell sounds.
Verify that the master FIRE WARN lights are illuminated.
Verify that the MASTER CAUTION lights are illuminated.
Verify that the OVHT/DET annunciator is illuminated.
Master FIRE WARN light – Push
Verify that the master FIRE WARN lights are extinguished.
Verify that the fire warning bell cancels.
Verify that the engine No. 1, APU and the engine No. 2 fire switches
stay illuminated.
Verify that the ENG 1 OVERHEAT and ENG 2 OVERHEAT lights stay
illuminated.

42 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

EXTINGUISHER TEST switch – Check


TEST Switch – Position to 1 and hold.
Verify that the three green extinguisher test lights are illuminated.
TEST Switch – Release
Verify that the three green extinguisher test lights are extinguished.
Repeat for test position 2.

APU switch……………………………………………………………………………START
Note: If extended APU operation is needed on the ground,
position an AC operated fuel pump ON (FWD Left fuel pump
switch). If fuel is loaded in the center tank, position the left center
tank fuel pump switch ON to prevent a fuel imbalance before
takeoff.
When the APU GEN OFF light is illuminated:
APU GENERATOR bus switches – ON
Verify that the SOURCE OFF lights are extinguished.
Verify that the TRANSFER BUS OFF lights are extinguished.
Verify that the STANDBY PWR OFF light is extinguished.
Note: Run the APU for one full minute before using it as a bleed
air source.

43 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

44 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PRELIMINARY PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE –


CAPTAIN OR FIRST OFFICER
Aft Overhead Panel:
IRS mode selectors..................................................................OFF, then NAV
Verify that the ON DC lights illuminate then extinguish.
Verify that the ALIGN lights are illuminated.
Verify that the following are sufficient for flight:
• Oxygen pressure
• Hydraulic quantity
• Engine oil quantity
ELT switch……………………………………………………………………………...Guard closed
SERVICE INTERPHONE switch………………………………………………………………..OFF
ENGINE panel…………………………………………………………………………………………Set
Verify that the REVERSER lights are extinguished.
Verify that the ENGINE CONTROL lights are extinguished.
EEC switches – ON
Oxygen panel…………………………………………………………………………………………Set
PASSENGER OXYGEN switch – Guard closed
Verify that the PASS OXY ON light is extinguished.
Landing gear indicator lights…………………………………………..Verify illuminated
Flight recorder switch…………………………………………………………….Guard closed

45 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

MACH AIRSPEED WARNING TEST switches.....................Push, one at a time


Verify that the clacker sounds.
STALL WARNING TEST switches………………….….Push and hold, one at a time
Verify that each control column vibrates when the respective
switch is pushed.
Emergency equipment..........................................................................Check
Fire extinguisher – Checked and stowed
Other needed equipment – Checked and stowed
Circuit breakers (P6 panel – behind F/O seat)..................Check (If installed)
Circuit breakers (control stand)........................................Check (If installed)
Circuit breakers (P18 panel – behind CAPT seat)..............Check (If installed)
Parking brake.................................................................................As needed
Maintenance documents .....................................................................Check
Overheat and fire protection panel……………………………………..…………Check
Complete this check if the Electrical Power Up procedure was not
done. This check is needed once per flight day and every crew
change.
Verify that the engine No. 1, APU and the engine No. 2 fire
switches are in.
Alert ground personnel before the following test is accomplished.
OVERHEAT DETECTOR switches – NORMAL
TEST switch – Hold to FAULT/INOP
Verify that the MASTER CAUTION lights are illuminated.
Verify that the OVHT/DET annunciator is illuminated.

46 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Verify that the FAULT light is illuminated.


If the FAULT light fails to illuminate, the fault monitoring
system is inoperative.
Verify that the APU DET INOP light is illuminated.
Do not operate the APU if the APU DET INOP light fails to
illuminate.
TEST switch – Hold to OVHT/FIRE
Verify that the fire warning bell sounds.
Verify that the master FIRE WARN lights are illuminated.
Verify that the MASTER CAUTION lights are illuminated.
Verify that the OVHT/DET annunciator is illuminated.
Master FIRE WARN light – Push
Verify that the master FIRE WARN lights are extinguished.
Verify that the fire warning bell cancels.
Verify that the engine No. 1, APU and the engine No. 2 fire switches
stay illuminated.
Verify that the ENG 1 OVERHEAT and ENG 2 OVERHEAT lights stay
illuminated.
EXTINGUISHER TEST switch – Check
TEST Switch – Position to 1 and hold.
Verify that the three green extinguisher test lights are
illuminated.
TEST Switch – Release
Verify that the three green extinguisher test lights are
extinguished.
Repeat for test position 2.

47 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

48 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CDU PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE –


CAPTAIN OR FIRST OFFICER
Start the CDU Preflight Procedure anytime after the Preliminary Preflight
Procedure. The Initial Data and Navigation Data entries must be complete
before the flight instrument check during the Preflight Procedure. The
Performance Data entries must be complete before the Before Start
Checklist.
The captain or first officer may make CDU entries. The other pilot must
verify the entries.
Enter data in all the boxed items on the following CDU pages.
Enter data in the dashed items or modify small font items that are listed in
this procedure. Enter or modify other items at pilot's discretion.
Failure to enter enroute winds can result in flight plan time and fuel burn
errors.
Reset the FMS in the MAINT Page as needed (to flush the CDU).

Initial Data...........................................................................................Set
IDENT page:
Verify that the MODEL is correct.
Verify that the ENG RATING is correct.
Verify that the navigation database ACTIVE date range is
current.

49 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

POS INIT page:


Verify that the time is correct.
Enter the present position on the SET IRS POS line. Use the
most accurate latitude and longitude in the following
order of preference: 1.GPS 2.Gate Position 3.Airport
Reference 4.Last FMC position.

Navigation Data…………………………………………………………………………………Set
ROUTE page:
Enter Origin and Destination.
Enter Flight Number.
Enter Flight Plan/Route or Load Company Route.
Activate and execute the route.

DEPARTURES page:
Select runway and departure routing.
Execute the runway and departure routing.

ARRIVALS page:
Select arrival runway and STAR/Approach if required.
Execute the arrival runway and routing.

LEGS page:
Verify or enter the correct RNP for the departure.
Verify that the route is correct.

50 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Performance Data…………………………………………………………………………..….Set
PERF INIT page:
CAUTION: Do not enter the ZFW into the GW boxes. The
FMC will calculate performance data with significant
errors.
Enter the ZFW.
Verify that the fuel is sufficient for flight.
Enter the Fuel Reserves.
Enter the Cost Index.
Enter the Cruise Level.
Enter the Cruise Wind.
Enter the ISA Deviation.
Verify or enter the Transition Altitude.

N1 LIMIT page:
Select an assumed temperature, or a fixed derate takeoff,
or both as needed.
Select a full or a derated climb thrust as needed.

51 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TAKEOFF REF page:


(Make data entries on page 2/2 before page 1/2).
Verify or enter the runway condition.
Verify or enter an acceleration height.
Verify or enter an engine out acceleration height.
Verify or enter a thrust reduction altitude.
Enter the takeoff flap setting.
Enter the CG.
Verify that a trim value is shown.
Select or enter the takeoff V speeds.
Verify that the Preflight is complete.

CLIMB page:
Verify or enter climb details.

CRUISE page:
Verify or enter cruise details.

DESCENT page:
Verify or enter descent and descent forecast details.

PROGRESS page:
Verify route distance.
Verify arrival fuel.

FIX page:
Set as needed.

52 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE – FIRST OFFICER


The first officer normally does this procedure. The captain may do this
procedure as needed.

Forward Overhead Panel:


Flight Control Panel…………………………………………………………………………..Check
FLIGHT CONTROL switches – Guards closed
Verify that the flight control LOW PRESSURE lights are
illuminated.
Flight SPOILER switches – Guards closed
YAW DAMPER switch – ON
Verify that the YAW DAMPER light is extinguished.
Verify that the standby hydraulic LOW QUANTITY light is
extinguished.
Verify that the standby hydraulic LOW PRESSURE light is
extinguished.
Verify that the STBY RUD ON light is extinguished.
ALTERNATE FLAPS master switch – Guard closed
ALTERNATE FLAPS position switch – OFF
Verify that the FEEL DIFF PRESS light is extinguished.
Verify that the SPEED TRIM FAIL light is extinguished.
Verify that the MACH TRIM FAIL light is extinguished.
Verify that the AUTO SLAT FAIL light is extinguished.

53 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

NAVIGATION panel…………………………………………………………………..……………Set
VHF NAV transfer switch – NORMAL
IRS transfer switch – NORMAL
FMC source select switch – NORMAL (if installed)
DISPLAY panel............................................................................................Set
SOURCE selector – AUTO
CONTROL PANEL select switch – NORMAL
Fuel panel…………………………………………………………………………………..………….Set
Verify that the ENG VALVE CLOSED lights are illuminated dim.
Verify that the SPAR VALVE CLOSED lights are illuminated dim.
Verify that the FILTER BYPASS lights are extinguished.
CROSSFEED selector – Closed
Verify that the VALVE OPEN light is extinguished.
FUEL PUMP switches – OFF
Verify that the center tank fuel pump LOW PRESSURE
lights are extinguished.
Verify that the main tank fuel pump LOW PRESSURE lights
are illuminated.
If operating the APU with less than 453kg fuel in the center tank:
FWD LEFT fuel pump switch – ON
If operating the APU with more than 453kg fuel in the center tank
and the flight deck is attended:
CENTER LEFT fuel pump switch – ON

54 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Electrical panel..........................................................................................Set
BATTERY switch – Guard closed
GALLEY power switch – ON
STANDBY POWER switch – Guard closed
Verify that the STANDBY PWR OFF light is extinguished.
Verify that the BAT DISCHARGE light is extinguished.
Verify that the TR UNIT light is extinguished.
Verify that the ELEC light is extinguished.
Generator drive DISCONNECT switches – Guards closed
Verify that the DRIVE lights are illuminated.
BUS TRANSFER switch – Guard closed
EQUIPMENT COOLING switches……………………………………………………….NORM
Verify that the OFF lights are extinguished.
EMERGENCY EXIT LIGHTS switch...............................................Guard closed
Verify that the NOT ARMED light is extinguished.
Passenger signs……………………………………………………...................................Set
NO SMOKING switch – AUTO or ON
FASTEN BELTS switch – AUTO or ON
Windshield WIPER selectors ..................................................................PARK
WINDOW HEAT switches..........................................................................ON
Position switches ON at least 10 minutes before takeoff.
Verify that the OVERHEAT lights are extinguished.
Verify that the ON lights are illuminated (except at high ambient
temperatures.)

55 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PROBE HEAT switches..............................................................................OFF


Verify that all lights are illuminated.
WING ANTI-ICE switch……………………........................................................OFF
Verify that the VALVE OPEN lights are extinguished.
ENGINE ANTI-ICE switches.......................................................................OFF
Verify that the COWL ANTI–ICE lights are extinguished.
Verify that the COWL VALVE OPEN lights are extinguished.
Hydraulic Panel..........................................................................................Set
ENGINE HYDRAULIC PUMPS switches – ON
Verify that the LOW PRESSURE lights are illuminated.
ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC PUMPS switches – OFF
Verify that the OVERHEAT lights are extinguished.
Verify that the LOW PRESSURE lights are illuminated.
Air conditioning panel...............................................................................Set
AIR TEMPERATURE source selector – As needed
TRIM AIR switch – ON
Temperature selectors – As needed
Verify that the RAM DOOR FULL OPEN lights are illuminated.
RECIRCULATION FAN switches – AUTO
Air conditioning PACK switches – AUTO
ISOLATION VALVE switch – OPEN
Engine BLEED Air switches – ON
APU BLEED Air switch – ON
Verify that the DUAL BLEED light is illuminated

56 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Verify that the PACK lights are extinguished.


Verify that the WING–BODY OVERHEAT lights are extinguished.
Verify that the BLEED TRIP OFF lights are extinguished.
Cabin Pressurization panel........................................................................Set
Verify that the AUTO FAIL light is extinguished.
Verify that the OFF SCHED DESCENT light is extinguished.
FLIGHT ALTITUDE indicator – Cruise altitude
LANDING ALTITUDE indicator – Destination field elevation
Pressurization mode selector – AUTO
Verify that the ALTN light is extinguished.
Verify that the MANUAL light is extinguished.
Lighting panel............................................................................................Set
LANDING light switches – RETRACT and OFF
RUNWAY TURNOFF light switches – OFF
TAXI light switch – OFF
Ignition Select switch......................................................................IGN L or R
For first flight of the day select IGN R.
Alternate the ignition select switch position on subsequent starts.
ENGINE START switches...........................................................................OFF
Lighting panel............................................................................................SET
LOGO light switch – As needed
STROBE light switch – OFF
POSITION light switch – ON
ANTI-COLLISION light switch – OFF

57 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

WING illumination switch –As needed


WHEEL WELL light switch – As needed

Mode Control Panel (MCP):


Mode Control Panel……………………………………………………………………………….Set
COURSE(S) – Set
FLIGHT DIRECTOR switch – ON
Move the switch for the pilot flying to ON first.

EFIS Control Panel (F/O):


EFIS Control Panel………………………………………………………………………………….Set
MINIMUMS reference selector – RADIO or BARO
MINIMUMS selector – Set decision height or altitude reference
FLIGHT PATH VECTOR switch – As needed
METERS switch – As needed
BAROMETRIC reference selector – IN or HPA
BAROMETRIC selector – set local altimeter setting/QNH
VOR/ADF switches – As needed
Mode Selector – MAP
CENTER switch – As needed
Range Selector – As needed
TRAFFIC switch – ON
WEATHER RADAR – OFF
Verify that WX radar indications are not shown on the ND.
MAP switches – As needed

58 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Side Console (F/O):


Oxygen ........................................................................................Test and set
Note the crew oxygen pressure.
Oxygen mask – Stowed and doors closed (if installed)
RESET/TEST switch – Push and hold
EMERGENCY/Test selector (if installed) – Push and hold
Continue to hold the RESET/TEST switch down and push
the EMERGENCY/Test selector for 5 seconds.
Verify that the crew oxygen pressure does not decrease
more than 100 psig.
Release the RESET/TEST switch and EMERGENCY/Test selector.
Normal/100% switch – 100%
Crew oxygen pressure – Check.
Verify that the pressure is sufficient for dispatch.
Cockpit lighting……………………………………………………………..........Set as needed

Main Instrument Panel (MIP):


Clock…….………………..………………………………………………………………………….....Set
Display select panel…………………................................................................Set
MAIN PANEL DISPLAY UNITS selector – NORM
LOWER DISPLAY UNIT selector – NORM
Disengage light TEST switch ........................................................... Hold to 1
Verify that the A/P light is illuminated steady amber.
Verify that the A/T light is illuminated steady amber.
Verify that the FMC light is illuminated steady amber.

59 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Disengage light TEST switch ........................................................... Hold to 2


Verify that the A/P light is illuminated steady red.
Verify that the A/T light is illuminated steady red.
Verify that the FMC light is illuminated steady amber.
Flight Instruments……………………………………………………………………………..Check
Verify that the flight instrument indications are correct.
GROUND PROXIMITY panel .....................................................Guards closed
Landing gear panel ....................................................................................Set
LANDING GEAR lever – DN
Verify that the green landing gear indicator lights are illuminated.
Verify that the red landing gear indicator lights are extinguished.
AUTO BRAKE select switch.......................................................................RTO
Verify that the AUTO BRAKE DISARM light is extinguished
ANTISKID INOP light ........................................................Verify extinguished
Engine display control panel .....................................................................Set
N1 SET selector – AUTO
SPEED REFERENCE selector – AUTO
FUEL FLOW switch – RATE
Move switch to RESET, then RATE.
Engine instruments ............................................................................. Check
Verify that the primary and secondary engine indications show
existing conditions.
Verify that no exceedance is shown.

60 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

MFD………………………………………………………………..…………………………SYS display
Verify that the hydraulic quantity indicators do not show RF.

Pedestal Panel:
CARGO FIRE panel ............................................................................... Check
This check is needed once per flight day and every crew change.
DETECTOR SELECT switches – NORM
TEST switch – Push
Verify that the fire warning bell sounds.
Verify that the master FIRE WARN lights are illuminated.
Master FIRE WARN light – PUSH
Verify that the master FIRE WARN lights are extinguished.
Verify that the fire warning bell cancels.
Verify that the green EXTINGUISHER test lights stay
illuminated.
Verify that the FWD and AFT lights stay illuminated.
Verify that the DETECTOR FAULT light stays extinguished.
Verify that the DISCH light stays illuminated.
VHF communication radios.......................................................................Set
VHF NAVIGATION radios.....................................................Set for departure
Audio control panel…………………………………………….....................................Set
ADF radios..................................................................................................Set
WEATHER RADAR panel.............................................................................Set
Select GAIN to CAL (Index mark vertical)
Select Mode to WX+T
Select Tilt +5°

61 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Transponder panel.....................................................................................Set
Mode Selector - STBY
Transponder switch - Set
If Captain is PF use system 1.
If First Officer is PF use system 2.
Altitude reporting switch - Set
If Autopilot A to be used, select 1.
If Autopilot B is to be used, select 2.
Code – Set
STABILIZER TRIM override switch .............................................Guard closed
WARNING: Do not put objects between the seat and the aisle stand.
Injury can occur when the seat is adjusted.
Seat ..................................................................................................... Adjust
Use the handhold above the forward window for assistance when
pulling the seat forward. Do not use the glareshield as damage can
occur.
Adjust the seat for optimum eye reference.
Whenever the seat is adjusted, verify a positive horizontal (fore
and aft) seat lock by pushing against the seat.
Rudder pedals ..................................................................................... Adjust
Adjust the rudder pedals to allow full rudder pedal and brake
pedal movement.
Seat belt and shoulder harness .......................................................... Adjust
Do the PRE-FLIGHT CHECKLIST on the captain’s command.
ATC Airways clearance....................................................................Obtain

62 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE – CAPTAIN


The captain normally does this procedure. The first officer may do this
procedure as needed.

Main Instrument Panel (MIP):


Lights…………………...………...……………………...………………………………….........Test
Master LIGHTS TEST and DIM switch – TEST
The fire warning lights are not checked during this test.
Use individual test switches or push to test features to
check lights which do not illuminate during the light test.
Use scan flow to verify that all other lights are flashing or
illuminated. Verify that all system annunciator panel lights
are illuminated.
Master LIGHTS TEST and DIM switch – As needed

EFIS Control Panel (CAPT):


EFIS Control Panel………………………………………………………………………………….Set
MINIMUMS reference selector – RADIO or BARO
MINIMUMS selector – Set decision height or altitude reference
FLIGHT PATH VECTOR switch – As needed
METERS switch – As needed
BAROMETRIC reference selector – IN or HPA
BAROMETRIC selector – set local altimeter setting/QNH
VOR/ADF switches – As needed
Mode Selector – MAP
CENTER switch – As needed

63 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Range Selector – As needed


TRAFFIC switch – ON
WEATHER RADAR – OFF
Verify that WX radar indications are not shown on the ND.
MAP switches – As needed

Mode Control Panel (MCP):


Mode Control Panel……………………………………………………………………………….Set
COURSE(S) – Set
FLIGHT DIRECTOR switch – ON
Move the switch for the pilot flying to ON first.
Bank angle selector – As needed
Autopilot DISENGAGE bar – UP

Side Console (CAPT):


Oxygen ........................................................................................Test and set
Note the crew oxygen pressure.
Oxygen mask – Stowed and doors closed (if installed)
RESET/TEST switch – Push and hold
EMERGENCY/Test selector (if installed) – Push and hold
Continue to hold the RESET/TEST switch down and push
the EMERGENCY/Test selector for 5 seconds.
Verify that the crew oxygen pressure does not decrease
more than 100 psig.
Release the RESET/TEST switch and EMERGENCY/Test selector.

64 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Normal/100% switch – 100%


Crew oxygen pressure – Check.
Verify that the pressure is sufficient for dispatch.
Cockpit lighting……………………………………………………………..........Set as needed

Main Instrument Panel (MIP):


Clock…………..………………………………………………………………………….………….....Set
NOSE WHEEL STEERING switch..................................................Guard closed
Display select panel…………………................................................................Set
MAIN PANEL DISPLAY UNITS selector – NORM
LOWER DISPLAY UNIT selector – NORM
Disengage light TEST switch ........................................................... Hold to 1
Verify that the A/P light is illuminated steady amber.
Verify that the A/T light is illuminated steady amber.
Verify that the FMC light is illuminated steady amber.
Disengage light TEST switch ........................................................... Hold to 2
Verify that the A/P light is illuminated steady red.
Verify that the A/T light is illuminated steady red.
Verify that the FMC light is illuminated steady amber.
Flight Instruments……………………………………………………………………………..Check
Verify that the flight instrument indications are correct.
Integrated Standby Flight Display (ISFD)………………………………………………..Set
Verify that the approach mode display is blank.
Set the altimeter.

65 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Verify that the standby flight instrument indications are correct.


Verify that no flags or messages are shown.

Throttle Quadrant:
SPEED BRAKE lever...................................................................DOWN detent
Verify that the SPEED BRAKE ARMED light is extinguished.
Verify that the SPEED BRAKE DO NOT ARM light is extinguished.
Verify that the SPEEDBRAKES EXTENDED light is extinguished.
Reverse thrust levers.............................................................................Down
Forward thrust Levers..........................................................................Closed
FLAP Lever.................................................................................................Set
Set the flap lever to agree with the flap position.
Parking brake.............................................................................................Set
Engine start levers.............................................................................CUTOFF
STABILIZER TRIM cutout switches ...................................................NORMAL

66 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pedestal Panel
VHF communication radios.......................................................................Set
VHF NAVIGATION radios.....................................................Set for departure
Audio control panel…………………………………………….....................................Set
WARNING: Do not put objects between the seat and the aisle stand.
Injury can occur when the seat is adjusted.
Seat ..................................................................................................... Adjust
Use the handhold above the forward window for assistance when
pulling the seat forward. Do not use the glareshield as damage can
occur.
Adjust the seat for optimum eye reference.
Whenever the seat is adjusted, verify a positive horizontal (fore
and aft) seat lock by pushing against the seat.
Rudder pedals ..................................................................................... Adjust
Adjust the rudder pedals to allow full rudder pedal and brake
pedal movement.
Seat belt and shoulder harness .......................................................... Adjust
When the F/O completes the Preflight Procedure:
Call “PRE-FLIGHT CHECKLIST”

67 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

68 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

BEFORE START PROCEDURE

Documentation and Cabin...........................Complete and ready B


Flight deck door ............................................. Closed and locked F/O
Do the CDU Preflight Procedure – Performance Data steps before
completing this procedure.
CDU display ........................................................................... Set B
Normally the PF selects the TAKEOFF REF page.
Normally the PM selects the LEGS page.
MCP ....................................................................................... Set C
AUTOTHROTTLE ARM switch – ARM
IAS/MACH selector – Set V2
Arm LNAV as needed
Arm VNAV as needed
Initial heading – Set
Initial altitude – Set
Taxi and Takeoff briefings ...............................................Complete B
Clearance to pressurize hydraulic systems………………………..Obtain C
ATC Start/Pushback clearance......................................... Obtain F/O
Call “BEFORE START PROCEDURE” C

69 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Fuel panel ............................................................................... Set F/O


If the center tank fuel quantity exceeds 453kg:
LEFT and RIGHT CENTER FUEL PUMPS switches – ON
Verify that the LOW PRESSURE lights illuminate
momentarily and then extinguish.
If the LOW PRESSURE light stays illuminated turn
off the CENTER FUEL PUMPS switch.
AFT and FORWARD FUEL PUMPS switches – ON
Verify that the LOW PRESSURE lights are extinguished.
Electrical panel ......................................................................... Set F/O
If using external power:
APU – Verify ON or Start
When the APU GEN OFF BUS light is illuminated:
APU GENERATOR bus switches – ON
Passenger signs..........................................................................Set F/O
NO SMOKING switch – ON
FASTEN BELTS switch – ON
Hydraulic Panel..........................................................................Set F/O
Electric HYDRAULIC PUMP switches – ON
Verify that the electric pump LOW PRESSURE
lights are extinguished.
Verify that brake pressure, and system A and B
pressures are 2,800 psi minimum.
ANTI COLLISION light switch......................................................ON F/O

70 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Trim…………………………………........................................................Set C
Check each trim for freedom of movement.
Stabilizer trim – ___ UNITS
Set the trim for takeoff.
Verify that the trim is in the green band.
Aileron trim – 0 units
Rudder trim – 0 units
Transponder ............................................................... As needed F/O
At airports where ground tracking is not available, select
STBY. At airports equipped to track airplanes on the
ground, select an active transponder setting, but not a
TCAS mode.
Call “BEFORE START CHECKLIST “ C
Do the BEFORE START CHECKLIST F/O

71 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PUSHBACK OR TOWING PROCEDURE

The Engine Start procedure may be done during pushback or towing:


1. Release the parking brake.
2. Use the SERVICES page in the IOS for Pushback Control.
3. When Pushback is completed, set the parking brake.

72 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ENGINE START PROCEDURE

Call “ENGINE START PROCEDURE” C


Select the secondary engine indications. F/O
Air conditioning PACK switches..........................................OFF F/O
Start sequence ...............................................................Announce C
Call “START NO. ___ ENGINE” C
Normal start sequence is number 2 then number 1
ENGINE START switch .......................................................GRD F/O
Verify that the N2 RPM increases.
When N1 rotation is seen and N2 is at 25%, or (if 25% N2 is not
possible), at maximum motoring and a minimum of 20% N2:
Note: Maximum motoring occurs when N2 acceleration is less
than 1% in approximately 5 seconds.
Engine start lever .............................................................IDLE C
Monitor fuel flow and EGT indications. B
Verify that EGT increases within 10 seconds of the engine start C
lever moving to IDLE.
At 56% N2, verify that the ENGINE START switch moves to OFF. F/O
If not, move the ENGINE START switch to OFF.
Verify that the START VALVE OPEN alert extinguishes when the F/O
ENGINE START switch moves to OFF.
Call “STARTER CUTOUT.” F/O
Monitor N1, N2, EGT, fuel flow and oil pressure for normal B
indications while the engine accelerates to a stable idle.

73 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

After the engine is stable at idle, start the other engine.


Normal starter duty cycle:
• Multiple consecutive start attempts are permitted. Each start
attempt is limited to 2 minutes of starter usage.
• A minimum of 10 seconds is needed between start attempts.
Normal engine start considerations:
• Do not move an engine start lever to idle early or a hot start can
occur.
• Keep a hand on the engine start lever while monitoring RPM,
EGT and fuel flow until stable.
• If fuel is shutoff accidentally (by closing the engine start lever) do
not reopen the engine start lever in an attempt to restart the
engine.
• Failure of the ENGINE START switch to stay in GRD until the
starter cutout RPM can cause a hot start. Do not re–engage the
ENGINE START switch until engine RPM is below 20% N2.

74 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

BEFORE TAXI PROCEDURE

Call “FLAPS ___” as needed for takeoff C


Flap lever ............................................................Set takeoff flaps F/O
Verify that the LE FLAPS EXT green light is illuminated.
GENERATOR 1 and 2 switches ................................................ ON F/O
PROBE HEAT switches..............................................................ON F/O
WING ANTI-ICE switch .................................................As needed F/O
ENGINE ANTI-ICE switches...........................................As needed F/O
PACK switches......................................................................AUTO F/O
ISOLATION VALVE switch.....................................................AUTO F/O
APU BLEED Air switch.............................................................OFF F/O
APU switch..............................................................................OFF F/O
ENGINE START Switches......................................................CONT F/O
Engine start levers …………..........................................IDLE detent C
Flight controls .................................................................... Check C
Push the MFD SYS switch to display the flight control surface
position indications on the lower display unit, if desired.
Move the control wheel and the control column to full travel
in both directions and verify:
• Freedom of movement
• That the controls return to center
Hold the nose wheel steering wheel during the rudder check
to prevent nose wheel movement.

75 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Move the rudder pedals to full travel in both directions and


verify:
• Freedom of movement
• That the rudder pedals return to center
Blank the lower display unit F/O
Recall ..................................................................................Check B
Verify that all system annunciator panel lights illuminate
and then extinguish.
Call “BEFORE TAXI CHECKLIST” C
Do the BEFORE TAXI CHECKLIST F/O

76 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TAXI PROCEDURE

Captain First Officer


Obtain ATC Taxi Clearance.
Release the parking brake. Turn ON TAXI light, RUNWAY
TURNOFF lights, and WING light
Apply enough power to start the
switches.
aircraft moving (N1 30%-35%) then
reduce to idle as required. There is
a slight delay between power being
applied and the engines
accelerating.

Limit taxi ground speed (GS) to Monitor taxi route and speed.
10kts when turning and in the
Call out conflicting traffic.
apron area and 30kts on long
straight taxiways. Turn ON Strobe lights when
entering or crossing runways.
Set the parking brake when not
moving.

BEFORE TAKEOFF PROCEDURE

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Receive Cabin Report.
The pilot who will do the takeoff updates changes to the takeoff
briefing as needed.
Set the weather radar display on PF side, as needed.
Set the terrain display on PM side, as needed.
Call “BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST” Do the BEFORE TAKEOFF
CHECKLIST

77 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

78 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TAKEOFF PROCEDURE [VNAV NOT ARMED FOR TAKEOFF]


Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring
Before entering the departure runway, verify that the runway and
runway entry point are correct.
When entering the runway: When entering the departure
Call “RUNWAY ENTRY PROCEDURE” runway, cycle the FASTEN BELTS
switch to secure the cabin crew.
Set the STROBE light and FIXED
LANDING light switches to ON.
Set the transponder mode selector
to TA/RA.
Verify that the brakes are released.
Align the airplane with the runway.
Verify that the airplane heading agrees with the runway heading.
When cleared for takeoff, set the
RETRACTABLE LANDING light
switches to ON.
Advance the thrust levers to
approximately 40% N1.
Allow the engines to stabilize.
Push the TO/GA switch.
Verify that the correct takeoff thrust is set.
Monitor the engine instruments
during the takeoff. Call out any
abnormal indications.
Adjust takeoff thrust before 60
knots as needed.

79 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


During strong headwinds, if the
thrust levers do not advance to the
planned takeoff thrust, manually
advance the thrust levers before
60 knots.
Call "THRUST SET".
After takeoff thrust is set, the captain’s hand must be on the thrust levers
until V1.
Maintain light forward pressure on Monitor airspeed and call out any
the control column until 80 knots. abnormal indications.
Maintain directional control with
the rudder pedals.
Verify 80 knots and call “CHECK.” Call “80 KNOTS.”
Verify V1 speed. Verify the automatic V1 callout or
call “V1.”
At VR, rotate toward 15° pitch At VR, call “ROTATE.” Monitor
attitude, rotating at approximately airspeed and vertical speed.
3 degrees per second.
After liftoff, follow F/D commands.
Maintain climb speed of V2+15 to
V2+25.
Establish a positive rate of climb.
Verify a positive rate of climb on
the altimeter and call “POSITIVE
RATE.”
Verify a positive rate of climb on
the altimeter and call “GEAR UP.”
Select the landing gear lever to UP.

80 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Above 400 feet radio altitude, Select or verify the roll mode.
verify roll mode or call for a roll
mode as needed.
At thrust reduction height verify that climb thrust is set.
At Acceleration height, call for flaps
up manoeuvring speed.
Set the flaps up maneuvering
speed.
Verify acceleration.
Call “FLAPS ___” according to the
flap retraction schedule.
Set the FLAP lever as directed.
Monitor flaps and slats retraction.
After flaps and slats retraction is
complete, call for a vertical mode
(“VNAV” or “LVL CHG”).
Push the VNAV or LVL CHG switch.
Engage the autopilot when above
the minimum altitude for autopilot
engagement.
After flap retraction is complete:
• Verify engine bleeds and air
conditioning packs are operating
• Engine start switches………….OFF
• AUTO BRAKE select switch….OFF
• Landing Gear lever……………..OFF

81 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


• Set RETRACTABLE LANDING
light, RUNWAY TURNOFF lights
and TAXI light switches to OFF.
Call “AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST”
Do the AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST

82 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TAKEOFF PROCEDURE [VNAV ARMED FOR TAKEOFF]


Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring
Before entering the departure runway, verify that the runway and runway
entry point are correct.
When entering the runway: When entering the departure
Call “RUNWAY ENTRY PROCEDURE” runway, cycle the FASTEN BELTS
switch to secure the cabin crew
Set the STROBE light and FIXED
LANDING light switches to ON.
Set the transponder mode selector
to TA/RA.
Verify that the brakes are released.
Align the airplane with the runway.
Verify that the airplane heading agrees with the runway heading.
When cleared for takeoff, set the
RETRACTABLE LANDING light
switches to ON.
Advance the thrust levers to
approximately 40% N1.
Allow the engines to stabilize.
Push the TO/GA switch.
Verify that the correct takeoff thrust is set.
Monitor the engine instruments
during the takeoff. Call out any
abnormal indications.
Adjust takeoff thrust before 60 knots
as needed.

83 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


During strong headwinds, if the
thrust levers do not advance to the
planned takeoff thrust, manually
advance the thrust levers before 60
knots.
Call "THRUST SET".
After takeoff thrust is set, the captain’s hand must be on the thrust levers
until V1.
Maintain light forward pressure on Monitor airspeed and call out any
the control column until 80 knots. abnormal indications.
Maintain directional control with
the rudder pedals.
Verify 80 knots and call “CHECK.” Call “80 KNOTS.”
Verify V1 speed. Verify the automatic V1 callout or
call “V1.”
At VR, rotate toward 15° pitch At VR, call “ROTATE.” Monitor
attitude, rotating at approximately airspeed and vertical speed.
3 degrees per second.
After liftoff, follow F/D commands.
Maintain climb speed of V2+15 to
V2+25.
Establish a positive rate of climb.
Verify a positive rate of climb on the
altimeter and call “POSITIVE RATE.”
Verify a positive rate of climb on
the altimeter and call “GEAR UP.”
Select the landing gear lever to UP.

84 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Above 400 feet radio altitude, Select or verify the roll mode.
verify roll mode or call for a roll
Verify VNAV engaged.
mode as needed.
At thrust reduction height verify that climb thrust is set.
Verify acceleration at the
acceleration height.
Call “FLAPS ___” according to the
flap retraction schedule.
Set the FLAP lever as directed.
Monitor flaps and slats retraction.
Engage the autopilot when above
the minimum altitude for autopilot
engagement.
After flap retraction is complete:
• Verify engine bleeds and air
conditioning packs are operating
• Engine start switches………….OFF
• AUTO BRAKE select switch….OFF
• Landing Gear lever……………..OFF
• Set RETRACTABLE LANDING light,
RUNWAY TURNOFF light and TAXI
light switches to OFF.
Call “AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST”
Do the AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST

85 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TAKEOFF FLAP RETRACTION SPEED SCHEDULE

Takeoff At Speed Select


Flaps (display) Flaps
V2 + 15 15
“15” 5
25
“5” 1
“1” UP

V2 + 15 5
15 or 10 “5” 1
“1” UP

V2 + 15 1
5
“1” UP

1 “1” UP

Limit bank angle to 15° until reaching V2+15

Use of Simulation Rate:


The following guideline should be used when operating using Simulation
Rate to accelerate a flight:
• 2x SPEED
o Above 10,000ft HAA when required
o During cruise when required
• 4x SPEED
o During straight cruise segments only when operationally
required

86 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CLIMB AND CRUISE PROCEDURE


Complete the After Takeoff Checklist before starting the Climb and Cruise
Procedure.

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


At transition altitude, set and crosscheck the altimeters to standard:
PM: “TRANSITION”
PF: “SET STANDARD”
PM: “STANDARD SET, PASSING FL ____, NOW”
PF: “CHECKED”
At 10,000ft MSL:
• LANDING lights (all).…….OFF
• WING and LOGO lights…OFF
• FASTEN BELTS..AUTO or OFF
(if in smooth conditions)
• Set the weather radar
display on the PM side, as
needed.
Set both center tank fuel pump
switches to OFF when a center tank
fuel pump LOW PRESSURE light
illuminates, or the FQIS indicates
approximately 0, whichever occurs
first.
If the TAT is below +10°C and Set ENGINE ANTI-ICE and WING
flight is through cloud or visible ANTI-ICE switches to ON at Pilot
moisture or ice exists, call for the Flying’s command.
ENGINE ANTI-ICE and WING ANTI-
Note: Set the ENGINE START
ICE switches to be set to ON.
switches to CONT before turning on
Engine Anti-ice.

87 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


When established at final cruise Respond “CHECKED”
level check all three altimeters and
MCP:
Call “MAINTAINING FL ____, ON
STANDARD”
Monitor the route flown.
For ETOPS flights, the APU must be
on for all the ETOPS segment.
Verify all flight plan changes and Before the top of descent, load
correct arrival procedures before the arrival in the FMC:
they are executed in FMC. (1) DEP ARR page:
Load and execute Arrival
Runway/Approach and STAR.
(2) LEGS page:
Verify correct route, remove
any discontinuities.
(3) APPROACH REF page:
Calculate and enter arrival
VREF based on Landing
Weight.
Plan for a Flap 30 landing. Use
Flaps 40 if Landing Distance
Available is less than 2,500m.

88 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

DESCENT PROCEDURE
The Descent Procedure is normally performed prior to descent.
Complete the Descent Procedure by 10,000 feet MSL.

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Set both center tank fuel pump
switches to OFF when a center
tank fuel pump LOW PRESSURE
light illuminates, or the FQIS
indicates approximately 0,
whichever occurs first.
Verify that pressurization is set to
landing altitude.
Review the system annunciator Recall and review the system
lights. annunciator lights.
Verify VREF on the APPROACH Enter VREF on the APPROACH REF
REF page of the FMC. page of the FMC.
Set the RADIO/BARO MINIMUMS selector(s) for the approach.
Set or verify the COURSE(s) for the approach.
Set or verify the VHF NAVIGATION radios for the approach.
Set the AUTO BRAKE select switch
to the required brake setting.
Complete the approach briefing.
Call “DESCENT CHECKLIST” Do the DESCENT CHECKLIST
Ensure the descent commences at TOD and monitor vertical profile.
Use the Speedbrake as needed to maintain vertical profile if more than
1000ft above path or 10kts above speed bug.

89 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


If the TAT is below +10°C and Set ENGINE ANTI-ICE and WING
flight is through cloud or visible ANTI-ICE switches to ON at Pilot
moisture or ice exists, call for the Flying’s command.
ENGINE ANTI-ICE and WING ANTI-
Note: Set the ENGINE START
ICE switches to be set to ON.
switches to CONT before turning
on Engine Anti-ice.
At 20,000ft HAA make the Cabin PA:
“CABIN CREW, PREPARE THE CABIN FOR LANDING.”

90 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

APPROACH PROCEDURE
The Approach Procedure is normally started approaching transition level.
Complete the Approach Procedure before:
• The initial approach fix, or
• The start of radar vectors to the final approach course, or
• The start of a visual approach
Note: When using QFE, the use of LNAV/VNAV and IAN are not authorized.
If a flaps 15 landing is needed because of performance:
GROUND PROXIMITY flap inhibit switch..................FLAP INHIBIT F/O

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


At transition level, set and crosscheck the altimeters:
PM: “TRANSITION”
PF: “SET ____”
PM: “____ SET, PASSING ____ FEET, NOW”
PF: “CHECKED”
At 10,000ft MSL:
• Call “10,000 / FL100”
• FASTEN BELTS switch..….ON
• FIXED LANDING lights……ON
• WING lights.....................ON
• LOGO light (at night)…….ON
Set the terrain display and Vertical
Situational Display (VSD) as needed.
Call “APPROACH CHECKLIST” Do the APPROACH CHECKLIST
Cycle the FASTEN BELTS sign
passing 5,000ft HAA, or before if in
adverse weather, to secure the
cabin.

91 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

FLAP EXTENSION SCHEDULE


Current At
Flap Command Speed for
Speedtape Select Flaps
Position Selected Flaps
“Display”
UP “UP” 1 “1”

1 “1” 5 “5”

5 “5” 15 “15”

15 “15” 30 or 40 (VREF30 or VREF40) + 5kt

See next page for recommended flap and gear extension schedule for a
Standard ILS or GLS approach Profile and for a Low Drag ILS or GLS
approach Profile.

The objective of the Standard Profile is to be in landing configuration and


in a stable approach from glideslope intercept. This procedure is most
commonly used for training operations.

The objective of the Low Drag Profile is to maintain a higher approach


speed and a continual deceleration until landing flap is set, to decrease
noise footprint and increase economy. This procedure is commonly
adopted for RPT operations and is most recommended.

92 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LANDING PROCEDURE – ILS OR GLS APPROACH


[STANDARD PROFILE]

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Initially:
If on radar vectors
• HDG SEL
• Pitch mode (as needed)
If enroute to a fix
• LNAV or other roll mode
• VNAV or other pitch mode
Call “FLAPS ___” according to the Set the FLAP lever as directed.
flap extension schedule. Monitor flaps and slats extension.
When on RADAR Vectors or on BASE
leg, call:
• “FLAPS 1”
FLAP lever……………………..…………..1
Engine Start switches………….CONT
When approaching Intercept
Heading, call:
• “FLAPS 5”
FLAP lever………………………………….5
Use LNAV or HDG SEL to intercept
the final approach course as needed.
WARNING: When using LNAV to intercept the localizer, LNAV might
parallel the localizer without capturing it. The airplane can then descend
on the VNAV path with the localizer not captured.

93 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


When on localizer intercept Verify final approach course
heading: heading.
• Verify that the ILS or GLS is When first positive inward motion
tuned and identified of LLZ pointer, call “LOCALIZER
• Verify that the LOC and G/S ALIVE”.
pointers are shown
• Arm APP mode
For autoland operations engage the
other autopilot.
At glide slope alive, call: When first positive motion of G/S
• “GEAR DOWN” pointer, call “GLIDE SLOPE ALIVE”.
• “FLAPS 15”
Landing Gear lever…………….DOWN
Verify that that the green landing
gear indicator lights are
illuminated.
FLAP lever………………………………..15
Set the RETRACTABLE LANDING
lights, TAXI light, and RUNWAY
TURNOFF lights switches to ON.
SPEED BRAKE lever………....……….ARM
Verify that the SPEED BRAKE ARMED
light is illuminated.

94 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


At glide slope capture, call “FLAPS Set the FLAP lever as directed.
___” as needed for landing.
Note: For a flaps 40 landing, set flaps
25 and decelerate to the flaps 25
speed before setting flaps 40.
When established on the Glide
Slope, set the missed approach
altitude on the MCP.
Call “LANDING CHECKLIST” Do the LANDING CHECKLIST
At the final approach fix or OM, verify the crossing altitude.
Monitor the approach.
If an autoland is planned, verify the AFDS status at 1,000ft RA.
Approach must be stable by 1,000ft RA when IMC, or 500ft RA when VMC.
Execute the missed approach At 1,000ft RA if IMC or 500ft RA if
procedure if the approach is VMC call: “STABLE”, if approach is
unstable. stable or “GO-AROUND” if
approach is unstable.
Decide: “LANDING” or “GO- When at DA(H) or MDA(H), verify
AROUND”. aural call-out or announce
“Minimums”.
If a manual landing, disengage the
autopilot and disconnect the
autothrottle no later than the
minimum use height for single
autopilot operation.
Maintain the glide path to landing.
For a dual channel approach,
disengage the A/P after touchdown.

95 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

96 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LANDING PROCEDURE – ILS OR GLS APPROACH


[LOW DRAG PROFILE]

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Initially:
If on radar vectors
• HDG SEL
• Pitch mode (as needed)
If enroute to a fix
• LNAV or other roll mode
• VNAV or other pitch mode
Call “FLAPS ___” according to the Set the FLAP lever as directed.
flap extension schedule. Monitor flaps and slats extension.
Decelerate to the flaps up
manoeuvring speed when
approximately 15nm DTG.
Use LNAV or HDG SEL to intercept
the final approach course as needed.
WARNING: When using LNAV to intercept the localizer, LNAV might
parallel the localizer without capturing it. The airplane can then descend
on the VNAV path with the localizer not captured.
When on localizer intercept Verify final approach course
heading: heading.
• Verify that the ILS or GLS is When first positive inward motion
tuned and identified of LLZ pointer, call “LOCALIZER
• Verify that the LOC and G/S ALIVE.
pointers are shown When first positive motion of G/S
• Arm APP mode pointer, call “GLIDE SLOPE ALIVE”.
For autoland operations engage the
other autopilot.

97 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


When approximately 12nm DTG or
localizer intercept, call:
• “FLAPS 1”
FLAP lever………………..………………..1
Engine Start switches………….CONT
When approximately 10nm DTG or
glide slope intercept, call:
• “FLAPS 5”
FLAP lever…………………..……………..5
When established on the Glide
Slope, set the missed approach
altitude on the MCP.
When descending through 2,000ft
RA, call:
• “GEAR DOWN”
• “FLAPS 15”
Landing Gear lever…………….DOWN
Verify that that the green landing
gear indicator lights are
illuminated.
FLAP lever………………………………..15
Set the RETRACTABLE LANDING
lights, TAXI light, and RUNWAY
TURNOFF light switches to ON.
SPEED BRAKE lever………....……….ARM
Verify that the SPEED BRAKE ARMED
light is illuminated.

98 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


At the final approach fix or OM, verify the crossing altitude.
At 1,500ft RA, call “FLAPS ___” as Set the FLAP lever as directed.
needed for landing.
Note: For a flaps 40 landing, set flaps
25 and decelerate to the flaps 25
speed before setting flaps 40.
Call “LANDING CHECKLIST” Do the LANDING CHECKLIST
Monitor the approach.
If an autoland is planned, verify the AFDS status at 1,000ft RA.
Approach must be stable by 1,000ft RA when IMC, or 500ft RA when VMC.
Execute the missed approach At 1,000ft RA if IMC or 500ft RA if
procedure if the approach is VMC call: “STABLE”, if approach is
unstable. stable or “GO-AROUND” if
approach is unstable.
Decide: “LANDING” or “GO- When at DA(H) or MDA(H), verify
AROUND”. aural call-out or announce
“Minimums”.
If a manual landing, disengage the
autopilot and disconnect the
autothrottle no later than the
minimum use height for single
autopilot operation.
Maintain the glide path to landing.
For a dual channel approach,
disengage the A/P after touchdown.

99 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

100 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LANDING PROCEDURE –
INSTRUMENT APPROACH USING VNAV
Use the autopilot during the approach to give:
• Autopilot alerts and mode fail indications
• More accurate course and glide path tracking
• Lower RNP limits.
This procedure is not authorized using QFE.

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Initially:
If on radar vectors
• HDG SEL
• Pitch mode (as needed)
If enroute to a fix
• LNAV or other roll mode
• VNAV or other pitch mode
Call “FLAPS ___” according to the Set the FLAP lever as directed.
flap extension schedule. Monitor flaps and slats extension.
The recommended roll modes for the final approach are:
• For an RNAV or GPS approach use LNAV
• For a LOC-BC, VOR or NDB approach use LNAV
• For a LOC, SDF or LDA approach use LNAV or VOR/LOC.
Verify that the VNAV glide path
angle is shown on the final
approach segment of the LEGS
page.
When on the final approach course intercept heading for LOC, LOC-BC,
SDF or LDA approaches:
• Verify that the localizer is tuned and identified
• Verify that the anticipation cue or LOC pointer is shown.

101 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Select LNAV or arm the VOR/LOC
mode.
WARNING: When using LNAV to intercept the localizer, LNAV might
parallel the localizer without capturing it. The airplane can then descend
on the VNAV path with the localizer not captured.
Use LNAV or HDG SEL to intercept
the final approach course as needed.
Verify that LNAV is engaged or that VOR/LOC is captured.
Decelerate to the flaps up
manoeuvring speed when
approximately 10nm before the final
approach fix.
When approximately 7nm before the FLAP lever……………………………….…..1
final approach fix, call: Engine Start switches……………CONT
• “FLAPS 1”
When approximately 5nm before the FLAP lever……………………….…………..5
final approach fix, call:
• “FLAPS 5”
Approximately 2nm before the final Approximately 2 NM before the
approach fix and after ALT HOLD or final approach fix, call
VNAV PTH is annunciated: “APPROACHING GLIDE PATH.”
• Verify that the autopilot is
engaged
• Set DA(H) or MDA(H) on the
MCP
• Select or verify VNAV.
• Select or verify speed
intervention, as needed.

102 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Call:
• “GEAR DOWN”
• “FLAPS 15”
Landing Gear lever……..………DOWN
Verify that that the green landing
gear indicator lights are
illuminated.
FLAP lever………………………………….15
Set the RETRACTABLE LANDING
lights, TAXI light, and RUNWAY
TURNOFF light switches to ON.
SPEED BRAKE lever………....……….ARM
Verify that the SPEED BRAKE ARMED
light is illuminated.
At or after the glide path capture, Set the FLAP lever as directed.
call “FLAPS ___” as needed for
landing.
Note: For a flaps 40 landing, set flaps
25 and decelerate to the flaps 25
speed before setting flaps 40.
Call “LANDING CHECKLIST” Do the LANDING CHECKLIST
When at least 300 feet below the
missed approach altitude, set the
missed approach altitude on the
MCP.
At the final approach fix, verify the crossing altitude and crosscheck the
altimeters.
Monitor the approach.

103 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Approach must be stable by 1,000ft RA when IMC, or 500ft RA when VMC.
Execute the missed approach At 1,000ft RA if IMC or 500ft RA if
procedure if the approach is VMC call: “STABLE”, if approach is
unstable. stable or “GO-AROUND” if
approach is unstable.
Decide: “LANDING” or “GO- When at DA(H) or MDA(H), verify
AROUND”. aural call-out or announce
“Minimums”.
If suitable visual reference is
established at DA(H), MDA(H) or the
missed approach point, disengage
the autopilot in accordance with
regulatory requirements, and
disengage the autothrottle at the
same time.
Maintain the glide path to landing.

104 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LANDING PROCEDURE –
CIRCUITS AND TOUCH AND GOS
This details the Circuit Procedure for Training. The Circuit Procedure is
normally started on the Downwind Leg with the FLAP lever set at 5 and at
flaps 5 manoeuvre speed, and assumes the Flight Director will be OFF.

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Circuit height is normally 1,500ft AFE.
Downwind spacing is approximately 2 NM abeam.
WARNING: Ensure the SPEED BRAKE lever is DOWN and the AUTOBRAKE
select switch is OFF for Touch and Go Landings.
When stabilized on downwind: Do the APPROACH CHECKLIST
Call “APPROACH CHECKLIST”
Before turning base or initiating
the turn to base, call:
• “GEAR DOWN”
• “FLAPS 15”
Landing Gear lever……..……….DOWN
Verify that that the green landing
gear indicator lights are illuminated.
FLAP lever………………………………….15
Set the RETRACTABLE LANDING
lights, TAXI light, and RUNWAY
TURNOFF light switches to ON.
If full-stop landing:
SPEED BRAKE lever………....…….ARM
Verify that the SPEED BRAKE
ARMED light is illuminated.

105 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Start descent as required
(approximately 600-700 fpm).
When on base leg, call “FLAPS ___” Set the FLAP lever as directed.
as needed for landing.
Note: For a flaps 40 landing, set
flaps 25 and decelerate to the flaps
25 speed before setting flaps 40.
WARNING: When planning for a
Touch and Go, use FLAPS 30.
Call “LANDING CHECKLIST” Do LANDING CHECKLIST
Final Approach spacing is approximately 2 - 2.5 NM.
Be stabilized on profile by 700ft - 500ft AFE.
Aim to touchdown at minimum 1,000ft past runway threshold.
For a Full-stop Landing, refer to the LANDING ROLL PROCEDURE.
For a Touch and Go Landing, after For a Touch and Go Landing, after
touchdown: touchdown:
• Maintain runway alignment • Check that the speed brake
• Call “FLAPS 15” lever is down
• Verify stabilizer trim is set • Set the stabilizer trim
• Move the thrust levers to • Position the FLAP lever to 15
vertical position and allow and monitor flap retraction.
thrust to stabilize • Verify or set Go-Around Thrust.
• Set Go-around Thrust.
At VREF, rotate toward 15° pitch At VREF, Call “Rotate”.
attitude, rotating at approximately
3 degrees per second.
Maintain climb speed of V2+15 to
V2+25.

106 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Establish a positive rate of climb.
Verify a positive rate of climb on
the altimeter and call “POSITIVE
RATE.”
Call “GEAR UP” Select the landing gear Lever to UP.
Verify that the circuit height is set.
If the airspeed is within the amber
band, limit bank angle to 15°.
At 500ft AFE, turn crosswind, then
continue turn onto downwind.
At 1,000ft AFE: Set the FLAP lever to 5.
• Set climb thrust Set the landing gear lever to OFF
• Call “SET FLAPS 5 SPEED” after landing gear retraction is
• lower the nose to 10° pitch complete.
attitude
• Verify acceleration Verify that climb thrust is set.

Level off at the circuit height and


set thrust to maintain the flaps 5
manoeuvring speed.
When entering downwind:
Call “AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST” Do the AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST
Recommence the Circuit Procedure.

107 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

108 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

GO-AROUND AND MISSED APPROACH


PROCEDURE

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Call “GO AROUND, FLAPS 15” Position the FLAP lever to 15 and
monitor flap retraction.
Push the TO/GA switch
Verify:
• The rotation to go–around attitude
• That the thrust increases.
Verify that the thrust is sufficient
for the go-around or adjust as
needed.
Verify a positive rate of climb on Verify a positive rate of climb on
the altimeter and call “GEAR UP.” the altimeter and call “POSITIVE
RATE.”
Set the landing gear lever to UP.
Verify that the missed approach
altitude is set.
If the airspeed is within the amber
band, limit bank angle to 15°.
Above 400 feet radio altitude, Observe mode annunciation.
verify LNAV or select HDG SEL as
appropriate.
Verify that the missed approach route is tracked.
At acceleration height, call “FLAPS Set the FLAP lever as directed.
___” according to the flap Monitor flaps and slats retraction.
retraction schedule.

109 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


After flaps are set to the planned
flap setting and at or above the
flap maneuvering speed, select
LVL CHG.
VNAV may be selected if the flaps
are up.
Verify that climb thrust is set.
Verify that the missed approach altitude is captured.
Set the landing gear lever to OFF
after landing gear retraction is
complete.
Set the engine start switches as
needed.
Call “AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST” Do the AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST

110 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LANDING ROLL PROCEDURE

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


If a manual landing:
At 20ft - 30ft RA initiate the flare by raising the nose by 2° - 3°.
After the flare is initiated, smoothly retard the thrust levers to idle, and
make small pitch attitude adjustments to maintain the desired descent
rate to the runway.
Ideally, main gear touchdown should occur simultaneously with thrust
levers reaching idle.
Align the aircraft with the runway using rudder while maintaining wings
level using aileron inputs.
If an autoland was accomplished:
Disengage the autopilot. Control the airplane manually.
Verify that the thrust levers are Verify that the SPEED BRAKE lever
closed. is UP.
Verify the SPEED BRAKE lever is Call “SPEED BRAKES UP.”
UP.
If the SPEED BRAKE lever is not UP,
Without delay, fly the nose wheel call “SPEED BRAKES NOT UP.”
smoothly onto the runway.

Monitor the rollout progress.


Verify correct autobrake operation.
WARNING: After the reverse thrust levers are moved, a full stop
landing must be made. If an engine stays in reverse, safe flight is not
possible.

111 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


Without delay, move the reverse Verify that the forward thrust
thrust levers to the interlocks and levers are closed.
hold light pressure until the
When both REV indications are
interlocks release.
green, call “REVERSERS NORMAL”.
If there is no REV indication(s) or
the indication(s) stays amber, call
“NO REVERSER ENGINE NUMBER
1”, or “NO REVERSER ENGINE
NUMBER 2”, or “NO REVERSERS”.
Apply reverse thrust as needed.
By 60 knots, start movement of Call “60 KNOTS”.
the reverse thrust levers to be at
the reverse idle detent before taxi
speed.
After the engines are at reverse
idle, move the reverse thrust
levers full down.
Before taxi speed, disarm the Call “AUTOBRAKE DISARMED”
autobrake. Use manual braking as
needed.

112 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

AFTER LANDING PROCEDURE


Start the After Landing Procedure when clear of the active runway or
during backtracking.
Engine cooldown recommendations:
• Run the engines for at least 3 minutes
• Use a thrust setting normally used for taxi operations

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


The captain moves or verifies that the SPEED BRAKE lever is DOWN.
Set the PROBE HEAT switches to OFF.
Set the RETRACTABLE LANDING lights and FIXED
LANDING lights switches to OFF.
Start the APU, as needed.
Set the ENGINE START switches to OFF.
Set STROBE LIGHTS switch to OFF when clear of the
active runway.
Set the weather radar and the terrain radar to OFF using the EFIS
control panel.
Set the AUTO BRAKE select switch to OFF.
Set the MFD to SYS.
Set the flap lever to UP.
Set the transponder mode selector as needed. At
airports where ground tracking is not available,
select STBY.
At airports equipped to track airplanes on the
ground, select an active transponder setting, but
not a TCAS mode.

113 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring


When approaching the terminal area prior to
parking set the RUNWAY TURNOFF lights, TAXI
light, and WING light switches to OFF.
When the aircraft is aligned with final parking
position make the Cabin PA:
“CABIN CREW DISARM DOORS AND CROSSCHECK.”

114 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE
Start the Shutdown Procedure after taxi is complete.

Parking brake............................................................................Set C
Verify that the parking brake warning light is illuminated.
Electrical power........................................................................Set F/O
If APU power is needed:
Verify that the APU GENERATOR OFF BUS light is
illuminated.
APU GENERATOR bus switches – ON
Verify that the SOURCE OFF lights are extinguished.
If external power is needed:
Verify that the GRD POWER AVAILABLE light is
illuminated.
GRD POWER switch – ON
Verify that the SOURCE OFF lights are extinguished.
Engine start levers............................................................CUTOFF C

When the N1 on both engines are below 10%:


FASTEN BELTS switch..............................................................OFF F/O
ANTI COLLISION light switch...................................................OFF F/O
FUEL PUMP switches...............................................................OFF F/O
If operating the APU:
FWD LEFT FUEL PUMP switch – ON
WING ANTI-ICE switch ...........................................................OFF F/O
ENGINE ANTI-ICE switches .....................................................OFF F/O

115 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Hydraulic Panel.........................................................................Set F/O


ENGINE HYDRAULIC PUMPS switches – ON
ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC PUMPS switches – OFF
Air conditioning PACK switches........................................... AUTO F/O
ISOLATION VALVE switch......................................................OPEN F/O
Engine BLEED air switches........................................................ON F/O
APU BLEED air switch...............................................................ON F/O
FLIGHT DIRECTOR switches .....................................................OFF B
Transponder mode selector ..................................................STBY F/O

After the wheel chocks are in place:


Parking brake…………………………………………………………………..Release C

Call “SHUTDOWN CHECKLIST” C


Do the SHUTDOWN CHECKLIST F/O

116 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SECURE PROCEDURE
IRS mode selectors................................................................OFF F/O
EMERGENCY EXIT LIGHTS switch...........................................OFF F/O
WINDOW HEAT switches…………………………..…………………..……OFF F/O
Air Conditioning PACK switches............................................OFF F/O
Call “SECURE CHECKLIST” C
Do the SECURE CHECKLIST F/O

ELECTRICAL POWER DOWN PROCEDURE


Complete this procedure only when powering down the aircraft or prior to
shutting down the simulator.

FUEL PUMP switches................................................................................OFF


APU BLEED air switch...............................................................................OFF
APU switch and/or GRD POWER switch...................................................OFF
BATTERY switch........................................................................................OFF

Ensure the Simulator is clean and tidy.

117 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

118 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

NON-NORMAL PROCEDURES

Non-Normal Procedures are limited to the Failures available in the


Simulator. Refer to the Instructors Operating Station (IOS) section of the
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual for a list of available Failures.

For Non-Normal Checklists (NNCs) and procedures refer to the ProJet


Series PS4.5 FSTD QRH (Quick Reference Handbook).

119 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

120 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PERFORMANCE INFLIGHT

Refer to the QRH (Quick Reference Handbook) for Performance Inflight


details.

Flight With Unreliable Airspeed/ Turbulent Air Penetration


Altitude and/or vertical speed indications may also be unreliable.

Climb (280/.76)
Flaps Up, Set Max Climb Thrust
PRESSURE ALTITUDE WEIGHT (1000 KG)
(FT) 40 50 60 70 80
40000 PITCH ATT
4.0 4.0
V/S
1700 1000
(FT/MIN)
30000 PITCH ATT
4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.0
V/S
2500 1900 1400 1100 800
(FT/MIN)
20000 PITCH ATT
7.0 6.5 6.0 6.0 6.0
V/S
4200 3200 2600 2100 1700
(FT/MIN)
10000 PITCH ATT
10.5 9.0 8.5 8.0 7.5
V/S
5600 4400 3600 3000 2500
(FT/MIN)
SEA PITCH ATT
14.0 12.0 11.0 10.0 9.5
LEVEL V/S
6700 5300 4300 3600 3100
(FT/MIN)

121 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Cruise (.76/280)
Flaps Up, %N1 for Level Flight
PRESSURE ALTITUDE WEIGHT (1000 KG)
(FT) 40 50 60 70 80
PITCH ATT 2.0 2.5 3.5
40000
%N1 84 87 92
PITCH ATT 1.0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
35000
%N1 82 83 86 89 94
PITCH ATT 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
30000
%N1 81 82 83 85 87
PITCH ATT 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
25000
%N1 77 78 80 81 83
PITCH ATT 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.5
20000
%N1 74 74 76 77 79
PITCH ATT 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.5
15000
%N1 70 71 72 73 75

Descent (.76/280)
Flaps Up, Set Idle Thrust
PRESSURE ALTITUDE WEIGHT (1000 KG)
(FT) 40 50 60 70 80
PITCH ATT
-2.0 -1.0 -0.5 0.0 0.0
40000 V/S
-2900 -2600 -2600 -2900 -3400
(FT/MIN)
PITCH ATT
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 1.5
30000 V/S
-2400 -2100 -1900 -1800 -1900
(FT/MIN)
PITCH ATT
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0
20000 V/S
-2200 -1900 -1700 -1700 -1700
(FT/MIN)
PITCH ATT -2.5 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0
10000
V/S (FT/MIN -2000 -1700 -1500 -1500 -1500
PITCH ATT
SEA -2.5 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0
V/S
LEVEL -1800 -1500 -1400 -1300 -1300
(FT/MIN)

122 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Holding (VREF40 + 70)


Flaps Up, %N1 for Level Flight
PRESSURE ALTITUDE WEIGHT (1000 KG)
(FT) 40 50 60 70 80
10000 PITCH ATT 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
%N1 53 58 63 67 70
5000 PITCH ATT 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
%N1 49 54 59 63 67

Terminal Area (5000 FT)


%N1 for Level Flight
FLAP POSITION WEIGHT (1000 KG)
(VREF + INCREMENT) 40 50 60 70 80
FLAPS 1 (GEAR UP) PITCH ATT 4.5 5.0 5.5 5.5 6.0
(VREF40 + 50) %N1 52 57 61 65 69
FLAPS 5 (GEAR UP) PITCH ATT 5.5 5.5 6.0 6.0 6.5
(VREF40 + 30) %N1 52 58 63 67 70
FLAPS 15 (GEAR DOWN) PITCH ATT 5.5 5.5 6.0 6.0 6.5
(VREF40 + 20) %N1 60 66 71 75 79

Final Approach (1500 FT)


Gear Down, %N1 for 3° Glideslope
FLAP POSITION WEIGHT (1000 KG)
(VREF + INCREMENT) 40 50 60 70 80
PITCH ATT 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5
FLAPS 15 (VREF15 + 10)
%N1 44 49 53 56 59
PITCH ATT 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
FLAPS 30 (VREF30 + 10)
%N1 48 53 58 61 65
- - - -
PITCH ATT 0.0
FLAPS 40 (VREF40 + 10) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
%N1 71
53 59 64 68

123 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

124 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PS4.5 WEIGHT AND BALANCE CHART

Zone A Zone B Zone C Takeoff Fuel

Weight IU Weight IU Weight IU Weight IU


500 3 500 3 1560 1
1000 6 1000 6 3120 2
1500 9 1500 9 4680 3
2000 12 2000 12 6240 4
2500 15 2500 15 7828 5
3000 19 3000 19 8620 4
3500 22 3500 22 9411 3
NIL EFFECT

4000 25 4000 25 10203 2


4500 28 4500 28 10995 1
5000 31 5000 31 11787 0
5500 34 5500 34 12578 -1
6000 37 6000 37 13370 -2
6500 40 6500 40 14162 -3
7000 43 7000 43 14954 -4
7500 46 7500 46 15745 -4
8000 49 8000 49 16537 -5
8137 50 8500 53 17329 -6
9000 56 18121 -7
9594 59 18912 -8
19704 -9
20496 -10
21210 -11

DOW Index  200


-
Zone A 

+
Zone C 

=
ZF Index

+
Fuel Index Effect 

=
Take Off Index

MTOW 79,015 KG
MLW 65,317 KG
MZFW 61,688 KG
F

125 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

126 PILOT OPERATING PROCEDURES © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

SECTION 6 – INSTRUCTORS
OPERATING STATION (IOS)
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number: 2.2 – 22/09/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................... 5

2. KVM ...................................................................................................... 7

3. IOS AND SIMULATOR SET-UP PROCEDURE ............................................ 9

4. MAIN MENU FUNCTIONS .................................................................... 11

5. SETTING THE LOCATION ...................................................................... 15

6. SETTING THE WEATHER....................................................................... 23

7. ATIS ..................................................................................................... 31

8. SETTING THE TIME .............................................................................. 33

9. LOADING AND MAINTAINING SITUATIONS.......................................... 37

10. SETTING FUEL AND WEIGHTS .............................................................. 39

11. FAILURES AND MALFUNCTIONS .......................................................... 41

12. HAZARDS ............................................................................................. 43

13. FMS COMPANY ROUTES ...................................................................... 49

14. SERVICES ............................................................................................. 51

15. COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................................ 53

16. SYSTEM VOLUME ................................................................................ 55

17. LATENCY.............................................................................................. 57

18. MAP .................................................................................................... 59

3 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

4 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1. This section of the PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual includes technical operating
instructions for the Instructor Operating Station (IOS) Console and Software for IOS
Software version PS45-22092015.

1.2. Note that some systems may not be applicable to the specific device being operated
which may not have applicable hardware/software upgrades.

1.3. The IOS is the control centre of the simulator where operators have the ability to:
1) Shutdown the Simulator
2) Check the status of the Simulator
3) Change the airport and runway the aircraft is located in
4) Change the position of the aircraft
5) Change the Weather
6) Set the Time of day and year
7) Manipulate the Fuel and Loading
8) Load and Save Situations
9) Set Failures/Malfunctions and Hazards
10) Monitor Radio Communications
11) Change the Eye-point of the Visuals
12) Pause and Freeze the Simulator
13) Control the PC’s running the Simulator

1.4. The Instructor’s Station also features a Flight-Path Map and Recording Device which
can:
1) View the current topographic position of the aircraft in relation with airports and
navaids
2) Record and view the flight path history of the aircraft including top-down map
view, vertical cross-section view, and significant points.
3) Save flight-path maps
4) Load flight-path maps
5) Print flight-path maps

1.5. The Instructor’s Station Console consists of:


1) 2 x Monitors
2) 1 x Computer Keyboard
3) 1 x Computer Mouse
4) 1 x Instructors Seat

1.6. The Lower Display screen is a touch-screen and displays the Instructor Operating
Station (IOS) Software. Each button may be touched, or alternatively clicked with the
mouse provided.

1.7. The Upper Display screen displays the Map view of the IOS.

5 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

1.8. The IOS Console is located in the rear-left of the Simulator Flight Deck, and is displayed
in the picture below:

2
7

1 Upper Display Screen – Map Display

2 Lower Display Screen – IOS Software

3 Desk Light

4 Instructor Headset

5 Computer Mouse and Keyboard

6 Instructor Seat

7 Instructor Checklists Holder

8 Simulator Power Switch, Start Button and Projector Remote

6 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2. KVM

2.1. The KVM system allows you to view and control the individual PC’s running the
Simulator from the Instructors Station.

2.2. Operating the KVM switcher:

1) From the instructors station press the ‘CTRL’ or the ‘Scroll Lock’ key twice in
succession then press the appropriate computer number as below:
i. IOS (Instructor’s Operating Station) PC
ii. FS (Flight Sim/Visuals) PC
iii. PSD (Prosim Display) PC
iv. PSS (Prosim Systems) PC
v. Sim Server PC

2) For example to select the PSS PC you press ‘CTRL’ + ‘CTRL’+ ‘4’ in rapid succession.
You will now have keyboard and mouse control of the PSS PC and its desktop will
be displayed on the Instructors Station monitor.

2.3. Warning - The KVM should be used for Maintenance/Support Operations only.

7 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

8 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3. IOS AND SIMULATOR SET-UP PROCEDURE

3.1. The Simulator must be started and shutdown following the procedure in Section 2 of
this manual.

3.2. The following procedure should be followed by the Operator to prepare the simulator
and configure the IOS once the simulator is started. Please refer to Section 5 (Pilot
Operating Procedures) of this manual for instructions to prepare the simulator for flight
and training operations.

3.3. Instructors Operating Station (IOS) Set-up

AIRPORT................................................Set desired Airport, Gate or Runway


POSITION............................................................................SLEW as required
WEATHER..................................................................Set Weather as desired
ATIS..........................................................................................Set as desired
TIME.....................................................................................Set Time/Month
FUEL and LOADING....................................................................................Set
Services....................................................................................Set as needed
Eyepoint……………………………………………………………………………...…………….....Set
Malfunctions…………………………………...…………………...…………………...….....Clear
MAP................................................................................................NEW MAP

3.4. Simulator Preparation

Simulator.................................................................................Clean and Tidy


Seats....................................................................................................Full aft
Seat Harnesses......................................................................................Fitted
Headsets………………………………………………………………………………………...Stowed
DOME/MAP lights......................................................................................Set
Air Conditioning…………………………………………………………………………………….Set

9 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

10 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4. MAIN MENU FUNCTIONS

4.1. The Main Menu Display is the default display of the Instructor Operator Station (IOS)
Software, when the Simulator is started.

4.2. The Main Menu is displayed on the Lower Display Screen and features all the controls
and options for the IOS Software.

4.3. Main Menu Features:

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10 15

21

22

23

11
6

12
5

16
15

17

18 3

26
20

29

25

13 14 19 2 12 24 27 30 32 28 31

1 SITUATIONS
 Select to load and/or maintain a Situation
 Refer Page 37.

2 GOTO:
 Select to change airport/runway
 Refer Page 15.

11 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3 WEATHER:
 Select to change Weather
 Refer Page 23.

4 SET TIME:
 Select to change Time of Day and Year
 Refer Page 33.

5 FUEL AND WEIGHT:


 Select to change fuel or weight state of the aircraft
 Refer Page 39.

6 SLEW:
 Select to Slew/change position of aircraft
 Refer Page 21.

7 SERVICES:
 Select to manage Ground Services.
 Refer Page 51.

8 MALFUNCTIONS:
 Select to manage System Failures/Malfunctions
 Refer Page 41.

9 HAZARDS:
 Select to manage Flight Hazards
 Refer Page 43.

10 ROUTES:
 Select to display the FMS Company Routes page
 Refer Page 49.

11 TRAFFIC:
 Select to change Density Percentage of AI Traffic in Visuals Software.
 Move the slider to desired Traffic Density percentage and then select the green
tick to activate the change.

12 COMMUNICATIONS:
 Select to view and monitor the radio frequencies and communications system
 Refer Page 53.

13 SCHEMATICS:
 Select to manage System Schematics Diagrams (if installed).

14 LIVE ATC:
 Select to activate LIVE ATC Feed (green tick will appear)
 Select again to deactivate LIVE ATC Feed (red tick will appear)

12 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

15 VOLUME:
 Select to manage system audio volume levels
 Refer Page 55.

16 ATIS:
 Select to manage ATIS Program (if installed)
 Refer Page 31.

17 EYEPOINT SETUP:
 Select to change Visual System Eye-point position.
 Select Captain, First Officer or Centre to move eye-point to result in no apparent
parallax error on the respective side/seat position.

18 LATENCY:
 Select to display and monitor Flight Control Latency Status
 Refer Page 57.

19 ATC:
 Select to manage the ATC Program (if installed).

20 SHUTDOWN SIMULATOR:
 Select to Shutdown Simulator PCs.
 Follow the prompts to Shutdown the simulator.

21 ZULU TIME:
 Displays Simulator Zulu Time (UTC) based on the local time and location set.

22 HOBBS:
 Simulator Hobbs Meter display (clocks any time the engines are running).

23 HOME:
 Select to return to the MAIN MENU.

24 NEW MAP:
 Select to reset the Map Display and Flight-Path Recording Device
 Refer Page 59.

25 LOAD MAP:
 Select to Load a Flight-Path Map that has been already saved
 Refer Page 59.

26 SAVE MAP:
 Select to Save current Flight-Path Map
 Refer Page 59.

13 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

27 ZOOM OUT:
 Select to ‘Zoom Out’ on Map Display
 Refer Page 59.

28 ZOOM IN:
 Select to ‘Zoom In’ on Map Display
 Refer Page 59.

29 PRINT:
 Select to Print current Flight-Path Map
 Refer Page 59.

30 FLIGHT PAUSE:
 Select to ‘Pause’ the Simulator.
 Select again to Un-Pause the Simulator.

31 FLIGHT FREEZE:
 Select to Freeze/Pause the Visuals but not the Simulation.
 Select again to Un-Freeze the Visuals.

32 SIDE BAR:
 Remains visible when not on Main Menu.

14 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5. SETTING THE LOCATION

5.1. To change the location and position of the aircraft, select either ‘GOTO’ or ‘SLEW’ on
the MAIN MENU.

5.2. Select ‘GOTO’ to change the airport and runway position of the aircraft. The following
page should be displayed:

1 5

1 AIRPORT:
 Select to change airport.
 Displays selected airport 4-letter ICAO Code.
 Refer Page 17.

2 RUNWAY:
 Select to change runway at selected airport.
 Displays selected runway.
 Refer Page 18.

3 POSITION AT GATE:
 Select position aircraft at nearest available gate at selected airport.

15 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4 APPROACH POINTS:
 Select to position aircraft on final approach for selected runway at selected
airport. Note that an airport and runway MUST be selected to use ‘Approach
Points’.
 Final Approach Points are based on a 3 degree glideslope to the runway and are
independent of an ILS.
 Select desired point: 15nm at 4500ft HAA, 12nm at 3600ft HAA, 8nm at 2400ft
HAA, 7nm at 2100ft HAA, or 4nm at 1200ft HAA.
 When desired point is selected, the IOS will prompt the user to set the desired
thrust setting. Use the following table to set the approximate thrust based on
the approach point:
ALTITUDE THRUST
DTG IAS CONFIGURATION
(HAA) SETTING
15nm 4500ft 200 Clean N1 40%
12nm 3600ft 180 Flaps 1 N1 40%
8nm 2400ft 160 Flaps 5 N1 40%
7nm 2100ft 150 Gear Down Flaps 15 N1 50%
4nm 1200ft 140 Gear Down Flaps 30 N1 60%

 Ensure the aircraft is correctly configured for desired approach point including
Flap Setting (using table above).

 UN-PAUSE simulator from MAIN MENU or CDU to release aircraft and conduct
the approach.

5 SEARCH:
 Select to Search for an airport by country, state, city or airport name.
 Refer Page 19.

6 GO TO RUNWAY:
 Select to position aircraft at threshold of selected runway at selected airport.
Note that an airport and runway MUST be selected to use ‘GO TO RUNWAY’.
 When selected, the aircraft will re-position to that runway. Wait until loading is
complete.

16 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5.3. To change airport, select ‘AIRPORT’ on the GOTO Page. The following page should be
displayed:
1

2
1 COMMON REGIONS:
 Select a common world region to select a common airport from the list instead
of using ‘AIRPORT’ feature below.
 Select either: Middle East, Europe, N & S America, or Asia/Pacific.

2 COMMON AIRPORTS LIST:


 Select a common airport from the world region selected.

3 AIRPORT:
 Select to change position to any airport in data base using ICAO Code.
 Database has over 24,000 airports worldwide.
 If an airport is entered that is not in the database, an ‘Airport Invalid’ message
will be displayed.
 When the ‘AIRPORT’ button has been selected, a scratchpad will be displayed.
 Enter the 4-letter ICAO Code of the desired airport into the scratchpad.

 A runway or gate must then be selected, to execute the change to the selected
airport.

17 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5.4. To select a runway at the selected airport, select ‘RUNWAY’ on the GOTO Page. The
following page should be displayed:

1 RUNWAYS:
 Select a runway from the list.
 Select the ‘GOTO RUNWAY’ button on the GOTO Page to re-position the aircraft
to the selected runway.

18 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5.5. To Search for an airport in the data-base, select ‘SEARCH’ on the GOTO Page. The
following page should be displayed:

7 8 9

1 SEARCH BY AIRPORT NAME:


 Select to search for an airport by Airport Name.
 Enter the desired name into the scratchpad.

2 SEARCH BY AIRPORT ICAO:


 Select to search for an airport by ICAO Code.
 Enter the desired ICAO Code into the scratchpad.

3 FILTER BY COUNTRY:
 Select to filter search results by Country.
 Select the desired country from the drop-down box.

4 FILTER BY STATE:
 Select to filter search results by State.
 Select the desired state from the drop-down box.
 Note: A Country must be selected to filter by State.

5 FILTER BY CITY:
 Select to filter search results by City.
 Select the desired city from the drop-down box.
 Note: A Country and a State must be selected to filter by City.

6 CLEAR:
 Select to clear Search Filter fields.

19 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

7 START POSITION:
 Once airport is selected, select to choose Starting Position at selected airport.
 Select desired starting position (gate or runway) from drop-down box.

8 AIRPORTS:
 Displays airport search results.
 Select desired airport.

9 FINISH:
 Select ‘OK’ to load selected airport and starting position.
 Select ‘CANCEL’ to return to GOTO page.

20 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5.6. To adjust the position of the aircraft on the ground or in the air, select the ‘SLEW’
button on the MAIN MENU. The following page should be displayed:
4 5

10

11

1 SLEW BUTTONS:
 When in Slew Mode, use the arrow keys to move/slew the aircraft in the
respective direction as indicated by the arrows.
 If the button is pushed for greater than 3 seconds the aircraft will continue
Slewing in the same direction until the opposite arrow is selected.

2 ALTITUDE BUTTONS:
 When in Slew Mode, use the UP or DOWN buttons to increase or decrease the
altitude of the aircraft.
 If the button is pushed for greater than 3 seconds the aircraft will continue
Slewing in the same direction until the opposite arrow is selected.

3 SLEW STATUS:
 Displays if Slew Mode is On or Off (Example displays SLEW MODE ON).

21 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4 YAW BUTTONS:
 When in Slew Mode, use the arrow keys to ‘Yaw’ the aircraft in the respective
direction as indicated by the arrows.
 Each time the button is selected, the speed of the ‘Yawing’ increases.
 Select the ‘STOP’ button to Stop the Yaw Motion.

5 SLEW SPEED CONTROL:


 Select the desired speed for slewing when using the ‘SLEW BUTTONS’.
 Select the Slow, Medium or Fast icon for the desired Slew speed.

6 PITCH:
 When in Slew Mode, select to change the pitch/tilt of the aircraft on its axis.
 Enter the desired pitch in degrees into the scratchpad.
 Displays the selected Pitch.

7 ROLL:
 When in Slew Mode, select to change the roll/tilt of the aircraft on its axis.
 Enter the desired roll in degrees into the scratchpad.
 Displays the selected Roll.

8 ALTITUDE:
 When in Slew Mode, select to change the Altitude of the aircraft in feet above
sea level.
 Enter the desired altitude the scratchpad.
 Displays the selected Altitude.

9 HEADING:
 When in Slew Mode, select to change the Heading of the aircraft in Degrees,
True.
 Enter the desired heading into the scratchpad.
 Displays the selected Heading.

10 IAS:
 When in Slew Mode, select to change the Indicated Airspeed of the Aircraft in
knots.
 Enter the desired IAS into the scratchpad.
 Displays the selected IAS.

11 SLEW/RELEASE:
 Select ‘SLEW’ to enable Slew Mode.
 Select ‘RELEASE’ to disable Slew Mode. ‘RELEASE’ will only be displayed when in
Slew Mode.
 Example displays SLEW MODE ON.

22 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

6. SETTING THE WEATHER

6.1. To change the simulated system weather, select the ‘WEATHER’ button on the MAIN
MENU.

6.2. The following page should then be displayed:

1
3

7 8 9

1 SAVED WEATHER THEMES:


 Displays saved Weather Themes.
 Select desired Weather Theme to set.
 Selected Weather Theme will be highlighted in blue.

2 APPLY:
 Select to activate saved Weather Theme set above.
 Activating loads the weather theme in the simulation.
 It is recommended to reset the TIME after loading new weather to reset AI
aircraft traffic flow and refresh ground textures.

3 SCROLL BAR:
 Use to view available saved Weather Themes.

23 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4 ADD:
 Select to create new Weather Theme – Opens Weather Editor (refer page 25).

5 EDIT:
 Select to edit saved Weather Theme – Opens Weather Editor (refer page 25).
 Use to make changes to current weather.

6 DELETE:
 Select to delete selected saved Weather Theme.

7 CLEAR WX:
 Select to clear simulated weather to normal visibility and ISA conditions.
 Deactivates selected Weather Theme.

8 APPROACH VISIBILITY PRESETS:


 Select ‘CAT 1’, ‘CAT 2’, or ‘CAT 3’ to activate the respective approach visibility
condition.
 The selected visibility condition will activate instantaneously once pushed.
 Once activated the selected Weather Theme will be disabled and the weather
will change to ISA conditions with the selected visibility.

9 CLOSE
 Select to close the page and return to the MAIN MENU.

24 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

If the WEATHER EDITOR is selected by adding or editing a saved Weather Theme, the weather
can be set through the following interfaces:

6.3. Weather Theme Name:

1 2

1 WEATHER THEME NAME:


 Displays the name of the selected Weather Theme that is being set in the
Weather Editor.

2 SET:
 Select to set or change the name of the saved Weather Theme.
 Enter the desired title into the scratchpad then select ‘OK’.

6.4. Cloud Layer Options:


2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9

1 LAYERS:
 Select a cloud layer to edit.
 Layers should be added in order of height starting with ‘Layer 1’ as the lowest
cloud layer.
 The selected cloud layer will be highlighted in blue.

2 ALTITUDE (MSL):
 Select to set the cloud base altitude in ft MSL (Feet above Mean Sea Level) for
the selected cloud layer.
 Enter the desired altitude to the nearest ft into the scratchpad then select ‘OK’.

3 CLOUD TYPE:
 Select to set the cloud type for the selected cloud layer.
 Select the desired cloud type from the displayed list with the following options:
Cirrus, Stratus, Cumulus or Cumulonimbus.

25 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4 CLOUD COVERAGE:
 Select to set the cloud coverage for the selected cloud layer.
 Select the desired cloud coverage from the displayed list with the following
options: Clear, Few (1/8 to 1/4), Scattered (3/8 to 1/2), Broken (5/8 to 7/8), or
Overcast (8/8).

5 CLOUD TOP:
 Select to set the type of cloud top for the selected cloud layer.
 Select the desired type of cloud from the displayed list with the following
options: Anvil, Flat, or Round.

6 PRECIPITATION TYPE:
 Select to set the precipitation type for the selected cloud layer.
 Select the desired precipitation type from the displayed list with the following
options: None, Freezing Rain, Hail, Rain, or Snow.

7 PRECIPITATION RATE:
 Select to set the precipitation rate for the selected cloud layer, for the
precipitation type set above.
 Select the desired precipitation rate from the displayed list with the following
options: Very Light, Light, Moderate, Heavy, or Dense.

8 ICING:
 Select to set icing for the selected cloud layer.
 Select the desired icing from the displayed list with the following options:
None, Trace, Light, Moderate, or Severe.

9 TURBULENCE:
 Select to set turbulence for the selected cloud layer.
 Select the desired turbulence level from the displayed list with the following
options: None, Light, Moderate, Heavy, or Severe.

26 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

6.5. Wind Layer Options:


2 3 4 5

6 7

1 LAYERS:
 Select a wind layer to edit.
 Layers should be added in order of height starting with ‘Layer 1’ as the lowest
cloud layer.
 ‘Layer 1’ represents the surface layer and ‘Layers 2 to 5’ represent wind aloft
layers.
 The selected cloud layer will be highlighted in blue.

2 ALTITUDE (MSL):
 Select to set the altitude in ft MSL (Feet above Mean Sea Level) for the selected
wind layer.
 Enter the desired altitude to the nearest ft into the scratchpad then select ‘OK’.
 For ‘Layer 1’ (surface layer), the wind speed and direction selected will be set
the same from the surface up to the altitude selected for that layer.
 For ‘Layers 2 to 5’ (winds aloft), the wind speed and direction selected will be set
for the exact altitude selected for that layer. The simulator will gradually adjust
the wind values automatically as the aircraft flies between the layers.

3 HEADING:
 Select to set the wind direction in degrees magnetic for the selected wind layer.
 Enter the desired direction to the nearest degree magnetic into the scratchpad
then select ‘OK’.

4 SPEED:
 Select to set the wind speed in knots for the selected wind layer.
 Enter the desired wind speed to the nearest knot into the scratchpad then select
‘OK’.

5 GUSTING:
 Select to set the wind gust speed in knots for the selected wind layer.
 Enter the desired wind gust speed to the nearest knot into the scratchpad then
select ‘OK’.
E.g. ‘14’ will cause wind speed to gust between the ‘SPEED’ set above and 14 kts.

27 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

6 TURBULENCE:
 Select to set turbulence for the selected wind layer.
 Select the desired turbulence level from the displayed list with the following
options: None, Light, Moderate, Heavy, or Severe.

7 WINDSHEAR:
 Select to set the Windshear strength for the selected wind layer.
 Select the desired Windshear strength from the displayed list with the following
options: Gradual, Moderate, Steep, or Instantaneous.
 The Windshear strength will affect the rate of change between the wind speed
and direction for the selected layer and the layer immediately above or below.

6.6. Visibility, Temperature and Air Pressure:

1 2

3 5

1 VISIBILITY
 Select to set the visibility in Statute Miles or Meters as selected below.
 Enter the desired visibility into the scratchpad then select ‘OK’.

2 VISIBILITY UNIT OPTIONS


 Select for visibility selected above to be set in ‘Miles’ (Statute Miles) or ‘Meters’.
 The selected option will be highlighted in blue.

3 TEMPERATURE
 Select to set the air temperature at sea level in Degrees Celsius.
 Enter the desired temperature to the nearest Degree Celsius into the scratchpad
then select ‘OK’.

4 DEWPOINT
 Select to set the Dew Point air temperature at sea level in Degrees Celsius.
 Enter the desired Dew Point temperature to the nearest Degree Celsius into the
scratchpad then select ‘OK’.

5 QNH
 Select to set the Barometric Air Pressure/QNH at sea level in Millibars.
 Enter the desired QNH to the nearest Millibar into the scratchpad then select
‘OK’.

28 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

6.7. Weather Editor Action Controls:

2 3

1 ACTIVATE NOW
 Select to activate the weather set in the Weather Editor.
 Enter the desired visibility into the scratchpad then select ‘OK’.
 Activating loads the weather theme in the simulation.
 Use to make changes to weather without changing the saved Weather Theme.
 It is recommended to reset the TIME after loading new weather to reset AI
aircraft traffic flow and refresh ground textures.

2 SAVE
 Select to save the weather set in the Weather Editor as a Weather Theme. The
following dialogue box will appear:

 Select ‘OK’ to save the Weather Theme.


 The Weather Theme will save as the name set at the top of the Weather Editor.

3 CLOSE
 Select to close the Weather Editor.

29 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

30 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

7. ATIS

7.1. The ATIS Interface can be used to activate predefined ATIS scripts for weather
scenarios used for training purposes. Each ATIS script is predefined including the
frequency used and the weather/scripting. The ATIS scripts are designed to be used
with selected Weather Themes.

7.2. When an ATIS script is activated, if a crew member tunes to the set ATIS frequency on
either COM 1 or COM 2, the ATIS script will play through the ceiling speakers on a loop
to simulate listening to the real ATIS.

7.3. To use the ATIS (Automated Terminal Information Service) Interface, select the ‘ATIS’
button on the MAIN MENU. The following page should be displayed:

1 6

1 SCRIPT NAME
 Displays selected ATIS script name.
 Select desired ATIS Script Name from dropdown menu.

31 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2 COM 1:
 Displays frequency currently set on COM 1.

3 COM 2:
 Displays frequency currently set on COM 2.

4 ATIS FREQUENCY:
 Displays the ATIS frequency for the selected ATIS Script.

5 ATIS SCRIPT:
 Displays the text dialogue for the selected ATIS Script that the voice will read
when a pilot tunes the ATIS frequency.

6 ACTIVATE:
 Select to activate the selected ATIS Script.
 When activated the button will be coloured blue and will lock the ability to
change ATIS Scripts. Once activated, the ATIS will play on a loop if either COM 1
or COM 2 is tuned to the ATIS frequency.
 Select again to deactivate the ATIS Script.

32 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

8. SETTING THE TIME

8.1. To set the ‘LOCAL’ Time of Day and Year on the visuals for the current position of the
aircraft, select the ‘SET-TIME’ button on the MAIN MENU.

8.2. The Set-Time page below should then be displayed:

1 2 3 4 5 6

10 11 12 13 14

1 TIME (HOUR):
 Select to change the Time of Day (hours).
 Enter the Time in Hours into scratchpad displayed.
 Time is in 24-hour time format (i.e. ‘16’ for 4:XXpm)

2 TIME (MINUTES):
 Select to change the Time of Day (minutes).
 Enter the Time in Minutes into scratchpad displayed.

33 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3 MONTH:
 Select to change the Month.
 Select the desired month from the displayed list.
 Different months change seasonal textures on the visuals/scenery.

4 SIMULATION RATE – NORMAL:


 Select to enable normal speed (1x) Simulation Rate.
 Will display in Bold when active.

5 SIMULATION RATE – 2x:


 Select to enable 2x speed Simulation Rate.
 Will display in Bold when active.
 Caution: Only use when flying straight flight segments (not recommended during
departure or approach phase below 10,000ft HAA).

6 SIMULATION RATE – 4x:


 Select to enable 4x speed Simulation Rate.
 Will display in Bold when active.
 Caution: Only use when flying straight flight segments (not recommended during
departure or approach phase below 10,000ft HAA).

7 DAWN:
 Select to enable ‘Dawn’ Preset.
 Preset changes Local Time to Dawn for the selected month of the year (refer
Point 3), for the location the aircraft is currently in.
 Select the COMMIT button to activate the Time Change (refer Point 13).

8 SUNRISE START:
 Select to enable ‘Sunrise Start’ Preset.
 Preset changes Local Time to the Start of Sunrise for the selected month of the
year (refer Point 3), for the location the aircraft is currently in.
 Select the COMMIT button to activate the Time Change (refer Point 13).

9 SUNRISE END:
 Select to enable ‘Sunrise End’ Preset.
 Preset changes Local Time to the End of Sunrise for the selected month of the
year (refer Point 3), for the location the aircraft is currently in.
 Select the COMMIT button to activate the Time Change (refer Point 13).

10 SUNSET START:
 Select to enable ‘Sunset Start’ Preset.
 Preset changes Local Time to the Start of Sunset for the selected month of the
year (refer Point 3), for the location the aircraft is currently in.
 Select the COMMIT button to activate the Time Change (refer Point 13).

34 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

11 SUNSET END:
 Select to enable ‘Sunset End’ Preset.
 Preset changes Local Time to the End of Sunset for the selected month of the
year (refer Point 3), for the location the aircraft is currently in.
 Select the COMMIT button to activate the Time Change (refer Point 13).

12 DUSK:
 Select to enable ‘Dusk’ Preset.
 Preset changes Local Time to Dusk for the selected month of the year (refer
Point 3), for the location the aircraft is currently in.
 Select the COMMIT button to activate the Time Change (refer Point 13).

13 COMMIT:
 Once desired time and month, or PRESET is chosen, select the ‘green tick’ to
activate the Time Change.
 Note: It may take a few seconds to load the time.

14 CANCEL:
 Select to Cancel loading Time Changes.

35 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

36 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

9. LOADING AND MAINTAINING SITUATIONS

9.1. To Load and/or Maintain a ‘Situation’, select the ‘SITUATIONS’ button on the MAIN
MENU. NOTE: Saved Situations will save and load aircraft location and time
parameters ONLY.

9.2. The following page should then be displayed:

1 2

4 3
1 LOAD/MAINTAIN SITUATIONS:
 Select ‘LOAD’ to view Load Situations page (as displayed above).
 Select ‘MAINTAIN’ to view Maintain Situations page (displayed below).

2 SAVED SITUATIONS:
 Displays (previously) Saved Situations.
 Select desired situation from list to Load.

3 CANCEL:
 Select to cancel loading selected situation.

4 COMMIT:
 Select to load the selected situation.
 Use AFTER desired situation has been selected.
 Wait for situation to be loaded 100% before resuming use of the simulator.
Loading may take up to a minute.

37 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

8.3 When the ‘MAINTAIN’ Tab is selected, the following page should then be displayed:

1 SAVED SITUATIONS:
 Displays (previously) Saved Situations.
 Select desired situation from list to Maintain.

2 SCROLL BAR:
 Use Scroll Bar to view list of (previously) Saved Situations.

3 SAVE:
 Select to Save a Situation.
 BEFORE saving, ensure the simulator is configured in the following order:
i. Set aircraft at desired Location and Position.
ii. Set desired Time and Month.
iii. Save Situation.
 Enter desired ‘Name’ of Situation into the Scratchpad displayed and then select
‘OK’ to save situation.

4 DELETE:
 Select to delete selected situation from list.

5 CANCEL:
 Select to cancel saving or maintaining selected situation.

38 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

10. SETTING FUEL AND WEIGHTS

10.1. To change the Fuel and Weight Settings of the Aircraft, select the ‘FUEL’ button on
the MAIN MENU.

10.2. The following page should then be displayed:

7 6

1 FUEL TANKS:
 Displays the fuel quantity of each fuel tank in Kilograms or Pounds.
 Select desired fuel tank to enter desired fuel quantity in the scratchpad.
 Wing tanks should be full before fuel is added to Centre Tank.
 Use ‘TOTAL FUEL’ Feature as preferred fuel loading device.

2 GROUPBOX:
 Displays the aircraft’s current Zero Fuel Weight, Gross Weight and CG (%MAC).
 Weights are displayed in Kilograms or Pounds.

39 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3 TOTAL FUEL:
 Displays Total Fuel Quantity in Kilograms or Pounds.
 Select to change Fuel Quantity.
 Enter desired fuel quantity into the scratchpad.
 Fuel will automatically be distributed into the 3 fuel tanks.
 The default fuel is 9,000 KGS / 19,842 LBS (as displayed above).

4 PERCENTAGE FUEL:
 Displays percentage of Total Fuel to Maximum Fuel.
 Select to change Percentage of Fuel desired.
 Enter desired percentage into the scratchpad.
 Fuel will automatically be distributed into the 3 fuel tanks.

5 CANCEL:
 Select to cancel loading fuel and weight changes.

6 COMMIT:
 Select to load/activate the changes made to fuel and weight loads.
 Use AFTER fuel and weight changes have been made.
 Check load is successful by observing Gross Weight and Zero Fuel Weight
figures.

7 WEIGHTS:
 Displays weights in Kilograms in Zone A, B and C.
 Weights replicate PAX and CARGO Loads.
 Adding weight in Zones A and C affect CG.
 Select desired zone to change weights.
 Enter the desired weight into the scratchpad.
 The default weight is 15,000 KGS / 33,070 LBS into Zone B only.

40 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

11. FAILURES AND MALFUNCTIONS

11.1. To set system failures/malfunctions, select the ‘MALFUNCTIONS’ button on the


MAIN MENU.

11.2. The Malfunctions Page will then display:

1 2

4 5 6 7

1 ARMED FAILURE:
 Displays Failure(s) that have been selected to activate during the Condition
displayed.
 Select ‘Remove’ to cancel Failure(s).

2 ACTIVE FAILURE:
 Displays active Failure(s).
 Active Failures are displayed in a solid yellow box.
 Select ‘Remove’ to cancel Failure(s).

41 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3 FAILURES LIST:
 Displays all available Failures in System Categories: Electric, Navigation, Busses,
Pneumatic, Fuel, Hydraulic, Heating, Engine, and Miscellaneous.
 To add Failure(s), select the desired Failure(s) from the list by ticking the box
next to the Failure(s).

4 ADD SELECTED FAILURES:


 Select to Add Failure(s) with set Condition, selected from Failures List.
 If no Condition set, selected Failure(s) will instantly activate.

5 ADD RANDOM FAILURE:


 Select to Add a generated Random Failure and Condition.

6 REFRESH:
 Select to Refresh Failures Screen to view latest Standby and Active Failures.

7 CONDITION:
 After a failure is selected from Failures List, SET one desired condition for when
the failure will occur.
 The following conditions can be set: Above ___IAS, Above ___ feet (AMSL),
Below ___ feet (AMSL), and After ___ minutes.
 To activate the Condition and Failure, select ‘Add Selected Failures’.
 If no Condition is Set, the Failure will activate instantaneously once ‘Add
Selected Failures’ is selected.

42 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

12. HAZARDS

12.1. To set Flight Hazards, select the ‘HAZARDS’ button on the MAIN MENU.

12.2. The Hazards Page will then display:

1 2 3 4

1 TCAS:
 Select to display TCAS Hazard page.
 Use to inject an AI Aircraft TCAS Conflict.

2 WINDSHEAR:
 Select to display Windshear Hazard page.
 Use to arm a Windshear alert.

3 ATTITUDE:
 Select to display Attitude Hazard page.
 Use to set an unusual attitude.

4 INCURSION:
 Select to display Incursion Hazard page.
 Use to inject an AI aircraft or vehicle runway incursion.

43 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

12.3. TCAS Hazard page (to set a TCAS conflict):

3
4

1 TCAS CONFLICT DIRECTION:


 Select a direction from where the TCAS conflict will pass through the current
aircraft’s trajectory.
 Choose from these options: 90° left, 45° left, straight, 45° right, or 90° right.
 When selected the button will turn blue.

2 VERTICAL SEPARATION:
 Select a vertical separation in ft (feet) from where the TCAS conflict will pass
through the current aircraft’s trajectory.
 Choose from these options: -1000ft, -500ft, -100ft, 0, +100ft, +500ft, or +1000ft.
 When selected the button will turn blue.

3 DISTANCE:
 Select a distance in NM (Nautical Miles) from where the TCAS conflict will be
injected in relation to the aircraft’s current position.
 Choose from these options: 3 NM, 5 NM, or 10NM.
 When selected the button will turn blue.

4 INJECT:
 Select to inject AI aircraft as a TCAS conflict based on the Conflict Direction,
Vertical Separation and Distance parameters set above.
 Inject AI aircraft will fly towards point set by above parameters based on the
aircrafts trajectory at the moment the ‘INJECT’ button is selected. The aircraft
will continue through this path and then disappear.

44 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

12.4. Windshear Hazard page (to set a Windshear Alert):

1 PASSING ALTITUDE:
 Select an altitude in ft AGL (Feet Above Ground Level) for where the Windshear
Hazard will occur.
 Choose from these options: 500ft AGL, 750ft AGL, 1000ft AGL, 1250ft AGL.
 When selected the button will turn blue.

2 DETECTION:
 Select an ‘Early’ or ‘Late’ Detection for the Windshear Hazard.
 When selected the button will turn blue.

3 ARM:
 Select to arm the Windshear Hazard based on the Passing Altitude and
Detection parameters set above.
 When armed, if the aircraft flies through the selected ‘Passing Altitude’ a
Windshear Warning will display on the flight instruments based on the selected
‘Detection’ option.
 When armed the button will turn blue.

Note: The Windshear Hazard does not create an actual Windshear weather event where
a noticeable change in wind velocity or direction is encountered. It is suggested that the
IOS Weather is set for Windshear and turbulence at the same ‘Passing Altitude’ set in the
Windshear Hazard to increase realism.

45 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

12.5. Attitude Hazard page (to set an unusual attitude):

1 ATTITUDE AXIS GRAPH:


 Displays bank angle on horizontal axis and pitch angle on vertical axis in degrees.
 Push or click on a position on the graph to set the ‘Attitude Pointer’ to the
desired bank angle and pitch attitude.

2 ATTITUDE POINTER (RED DOT):


 Shows the selected bank angle and pitch attitude.
 Moves to the selected position on the graph.

3 PRODUCE:
 Select to activate the selected bank angle and pitch attitude based on the
‘Attitude Pointer’.
 Producing the Attitude Hazard will cause the aircraft to instantly change to the
desired bank angle and pitch attitude.

46 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

12.6. Incursion Hazard page (to set a predefined runway incursion):

1 VEHICLE CATEGORY:
 Select ‘Aircraft’ or Ground ‘Vehicle’ option for the desired runway incursion.
 When selected the button will turn blue.

2 INCURSION OBJECT:
 Displays selected object.
 Select to display a dropdown menu to choose a desired object from an option
list based on the ‘Vehicle Category’ selected above.

3 INCURSION SCENARIO:
 Displays selected Incursion Scenario.
 Select to display a dropdown menu to choose a desired Incursion Scenario from
an option list.
 Incursion Scenarios options are predefined and will include the airport ICAO,
Runway Designator and Intersection Taxiway Designator for the scenario.

4 CREATE INCURSION:
 Select to activate the runway incursion.
 Activating the incursion will produce the selected vehicle object at the holding
point of the selected runway, on the selected taxiway intersection, at the
selected airport, which will then taxi onto and line up on the runway, then stop.
The selected vehicle object will remain in this position until it is ‘cleared’.

47 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5 CLEAR INCURSION:
 Will only become active if an incursion is produced.
 Select to clear the selected runway incursion object.
 Clearing the incursion will cause the vehicle object to disappear.

48 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

13. FMS COMPANY ROUTES

13.1. To save and manage Company Routes (flight plans) for the FMS (Flight Management
System), select the ‘ROUTES’ button on the MAIN MENU. Flight Plans can be stored
here as Company Routes, which can then be loaded into “CO ROUTE” field on the
RTE (Route) page of the FMC (Flight Management Computer).

13.2. The following page should then be displayed:

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

1 COMPANY ROUTES:
 Displays database of stored Company Routes (flight plans).

2 ROUTE box:
 Displays the route for the selected Company Route or new Company Route in
ICAO ATC format.
 When saving a Company Route, type the route into this box or import a route
from the FMC (refer 4 below).
 When typing a route, use the following ICAO ATC format: “AIRPORT STATION
AIRWAY STATION AIRPORT” (example: “YSSY WOL H65 RAZZI Q29 ML YMML”).

3 LOAD SELECTED ROUTE FROM DATABASE:


 Select to view/edit a stored Company Route in the database (1 above).
 A Company Route from the database must be highlighted in 1 (above) before
selecting.

4 LOAD ROUTE FROM FMS:


 Select to load/import the route/flight plan that is already loaded in the RTE
(Route) Page of the FMC.

49 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5 DELETE SELECTED COMPANY ROUTE:


 Select to delete a stored Company Route in the database (1 above).
 A Company Route from the database must be highlighted in 1 (above) before
selecting.

6 STORE ROUTE AS box:


 Displays the title of the Company Route.
 When saving a Company Route, type the intended title into this box and then
select ‘STORE’ (refer 7 below).
 Use this title when loading the Company Route in the FMC by entering it into the
“CO ROUTE” field on the RTE (Route) page.

7 STORE:
 Select to store the selected route/ flight plan (in 2 above) under the selected
title (in 6 above).

8 FLIGHT PLAN box:


 Displays the flight plan for the selected Company Route or new Company Route.
 Flight plan parameters include: Waypoint, Position (coordinates), Bearing,
Distance (nm).

50 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

14. SERVICES

14.1. To manage Ground Services, select the ‘SERVICES’ button on the MAIN MENU.

14.2. Ground Services will only be available when the aircraft is on the ground and
stationary.

14.3. When selected the following page will be displayed:

3 5

1 EXTERNAL SYSTEMS – POWER:


 Select to install an external electrical power source to the aircraft.
 When installed, the ‘Power’ button will fill in on the IOS, and the External Power
available light will illuminate on the Forward Overhead Panel.
 Moving the aircraft will automatically disconnect External Power.

2 PUSH BACK CONTROL – LEFT:


 Select to commence a ‘tail-left’ Pushback to end with the tail facing 90 degrees
to the left from the original position. After the turn, the pushback will continue
straight-back until ‘Stop’ is selected.

3 PUSH BACK CONTROL – STRAIGHT:


 Select to commence a ‘straight’ Pushback.

4 PUSH BACK CONTROL – RIGHT:


 Select to commence a ‘tail-right’ Pushback to end with the tail facing 90 degrees
to the right from the original position. After the turn, the pushback will continue
straight-back until ‘Stop’ is selected.

5 PUSH BACK CONTROL – STOP:


 Select to stop the Pushback.

51 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

52 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

15. COMMUNICATIONS

15.1. To monitor Pilot VHF Radio Communication Frequencies, select the


‘COMMUNICATIONS’ button on the MAIN MENU.

15.2. Use to verify the Pilots are tuning to correct Radio frequency when simulating
Air Traffic Control, to manage desired ATC frequencies and to simulate calling
the Flight Deck from the cabin.

15.3. When selected the following page will be displayed:

1 FLIGHT CREW RADIO FREQUENCY COM 1 AND COM 2:


 Displays the active frequencies for COM 1 and COM 2 set on the Pedestal Radio
Panel by the Flight Crew.
 Display will turn green if the frequency matches the frequency set in the
‘Observer Radio’ for the respective COM radio, and a pilot has pushed the R/T
(Radio Transmit) button on the control column or ACP (Audio Control Panel).
Green indicates the pilot has tuned the correct frequency on the correct COM
Radio as set by the Observer and is pushing the correct button to transmit.

53 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2 OBSERVER RADIO FREQUENCY COM 1 AND COM 2:


 Displays the selected Observer/ATC frequency for COM 1 and COM 2 Radios.
 Display will turn green if the frequency matches the active frequency for the
respective COM radio, and a pilot has pushed the R/T (Radio Transmit) button
on the control column or ACP (Audio Control Panel). Green indicates the pilot
has tuned the correct frequency on the correct COM Radio as set by the
Observer and is pushing the correct button to transmit.

3 KEYPAD:
 Use to key in the desired VHF radio frequency for COM 1 and COM 2 to set as
the Observer frequency.

4 COPY FC COM 1 AND COM 2:


 Select to copy the active frequency for COM 1 and COM 2 as set by the Flight
Crew to the Observer frequency for the respective COM radio.

5 MIC – CAPTAIN AND FIRST OFFICER:


 Indicates the Microphone/Transmit channel selected on the Captain’s and First
Officer’s ACP (Audio Control Panel).
 Selected channel is displayed in green.
 Only one channel can be selected at a time.

6 RECEIVER – CAPTAIN AND FIRST OFFICER:


 Indicates the Receiver channel selected on the Captain’s and First Officer’s ACP
(Audio Control Panel).
 Selected channels are displayed in yellow.
 Multiple channels can be selected at once.

7 R/T AND I/C – CAPTAIN AND FIRST OFFICER:


 Indicates when the Captain and First Officer push the R/T (Radio Transmit) and
I/C (Intercom) switches on their control columns and ACP (Audio Control Panel).
 the Receiver channel selected on the Captain’s and First Officer’s ACP (Audio
Control Panel).
 R/T (Radio Transmit) will display in orange when R/T button is pushed.
 I/C (Intercom) will display in aqua when I/C button is pushed.

8 ATTEND CALL
 Press to activate Call chime and to illuminate ‘Call’ light on the overhead panel.
 ‘Call’ light will extinguish after 10 seconds.
 Use to simulate call from the cabin to the Flight Deck.

54 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

16. SYSTEM VOLUME

16.1. To manage audio volume levels, select the ‘VOLUME’ button on the MAIN MENU.

16.2. When selected the following page will be displayed:

10 FLIGHT SIM VOLUME


 Displays the current volume level of the Engines and Environment speakers
outside the simulator.
 Move the slider to set the desired audio volume level.
 100% represents the approximate real-world volume level.

11 AURAL WARNINGS VOLUME


 Displays the current volume level of the Aural Warnings and Alerts played
through the ceiling speakers.
 Move the slider to set the desired audio volume level.
 100% represents the approximate real-world volume level.

12 LIVE ATC VOLUME


 Displays the current volume level of the Live ATC feed played through the ceiling
speakers.
 Move the slider to set the desired audio volume level.

55 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

13 ATIS VOLUME
 Displays the current volume level of the ATIS played through the ceiling
speakers.
 Move the slider to set the desired audio volume level.

14 CLOSE
 Select to close the page and return to the MAIN MENU.

56 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

17. LATENCY

17.1. To display and monitor Flight Control Latency, select the ‘LATENCY’ button on the
MAIN MENU.

17.2. Each Flight Control input is tested by the IOS when the device is started to ensure
the transport delay time or any design parameters is out of original tolerances.

17.3. Control inputs are polled by the software interfaces every 50 milliseconds to
ensure the device is both responding and meets the requirements. If the test fails,
an error message appears on the IOS identifying the control(s) out of tolerance,
and simulator operation cannot be continued. It the test is successful, a message
will appear stating “Simulation Start – Simulator successful test conditions”.

17.4. When selected the following page will be displayed:

1 2

1 RESET DATABASE:
 FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES ONLY
 Select to reset the Latency Database.

2 RESET REFRESH RATE:


 FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES ONLY
 Select to reset the Latency Refresh Rate.

57 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3 THROTTLES LATENCY:
 Displays the current latency of the Thrust Levers in milliseconds (ms).

4 FLIGHT CONTROLS LATENCY:


 Displays the current latency of the Flight Controls in milliseconds (ms).

5 SIMULATOR CONNECTION ERROR MESSAGE:


 This or a similar message will display if a latency test fails (refer 13.3 above);
identifying the control(s) out of tolerance, and simulator operation cannot be
continued until the issue is rectified.
 The above example indicates the Throttles have either lost connection or are out
of latency tolerances.

58 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

18. MAP

18.1. The Map has the following functions:

1) View the current position of the aircraft on a Map/Azimuth in relation


with airports and navaids.
2) Record and view the flight path history of the aircraft on the map and a
vertical scale.
3) Save flight-path maps.
4) Load flight-path maps.

18.2. The Map is displayed on the Upper Display Screen of the Instructor’s Station,
and is controlled from the Instructor’s Station MAIN MENU, and the computer
mouse.

18.3. MAP KEY:


a) Below is a key of the features on the Map:

18.4. USING THE MAP:

1) Before each flight, and/or after changing the position of the aircraft, select NEW
MAP on the Instructor’s Station MAIN MENU. This resets the map to the aircraft’s
current position and clears the flight-path data history. Once selected, a box will
appear to enter map information:
 If desired, select and enter name of Title, Instructor’s Name and Pilot’s
Name in respective fields using the scratchpad as prompted.
 Select ‘OK’.

59 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2) To Zoom IN on the Map:


i. Select the ‘ZOOM IN’ button on the MAIN MENU; OR
ii. Using the computer mouse, hold the right key and roll the mouse-wheel
forward/up.

3) To Zoom OUT on the Map:


i. Select the ‘ZOOM OUT’ button on the MAIN MENU; OR
ii. Using the computer mouse, hold the right key and roll the mouse-wheel
backward/down.

4) To Pan around the Map:


i. Using the computer mouse, hold the left key and roll the mouse-wheel in the
desired panning direction.

5) MAP Features:
i. Below is a Cleared Map, after ‘NEW MAP’ on the MAIN MENU has been
selected.

1
3

1 Map:
 Use KEY in this section of the Manual.
 Grid lines represent Latitude and Longitudinal line to the nearest 10 minutes.

60 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2 Vertical Scale:
 Provides Vertical Flight-Path Data History.
 Grid lines represent altitude in feet above sea level as indicated on the left side
of the scale.

3 Aircraft Position:
 Displays current aircraft position on Map.

18.5. FLIGHT-PATH HISTORY DEVICE:

• Once ‘NEW MAP’ has been selected, as the aircraft is in operation, its history is
recorded by a green line marked on the Map Azimuth and Vertical Scale on the
Map Display behind the aircraft position pointer.

• During Operation, the Map will pan with the aircraft, keeping the aircraft position in
the centre of the Map. The Flight-Path History will remain on the Map until cleared
by the ‘NEW MAP’ feature on the MAIN MENU.

• MAP AZIMUTH:
o Displays horizontal flight-path tracking history of the aircraft on Map.
o Displays Significant Points such as:
 GEAR UP POINT
 GEAR DOWN POINT
o Displays Localiser ILS ‘Feather’ of the ILS tuned on NAV 1, providing the ILS
is within 30nm of the aircraft’s current position.

• VERTICAL SCALE:
o Displays vertical flight-path history of the aircraft.
o Displays the Glideslope ILS ‘Feather’ of the ILS tuned on NAV 1, providing
the ILS is within 30nm of the aircraft’s current position.

• SAVING FLIGHT-PATH HISTORY:


o Select ‘SAVE MAP’ on the Main Menu.
o Enter tdesired Title of the Flight Session into the scratchpad and select OK.
o The Flight-path Data on the Map will be saved.

• LOADING FLIGHT-PATH HISTORY:


o Select ‘LOAD MAP’ on the Main Menu.
o Select the desired MAP TITLE from the list displayed.
o The Map will then load on the Upper Display Screen of the Instructor’s
Station.
o Note that Maps must be ‘Saved’ previously before Loaded.

61 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

• PRINTING MAP:
o To Print the Current Map View, Select the ‘PRINT’ icon on the Main Menu.
o The Map Azimuth and Vertical Scale View that is currently on the Upper
Display Screen will then print.
NOTE: A Printer must be connected or networked to, and appropriately
installed on the Instructor’s Station PC to use this feature.

• FLIGHT-PATH MAP HISTORY FEATURES:


o Below is the Map view after approach and landing into Brisbane, Australia
(YBBN), on the runway 19 ILS Approach: 1

6 2

1 Flight-Path History Player.

2 Flight-Path History Tracker.

3 Glideslope Feather.

4 Localiser Feather.

5 Localiser Path Indicator.

6 Current Aircraft Position.

7 Glideslope Path Indicator.

62 INSTRUCTORS OPERATING STATION (IOS) © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd




Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.





^d/KEϳʹ
^z^dD^^Z/Wd/KE
W^ϰ͘ϱ^ŝŵƵůĂƚŽƌKƉĞƌĂƚŝŽŶƐDĂŶƵĂů





Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number 2.1 - 10/08/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Simulator General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

The ProJet PS4.5 Device Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Flight Model/Handling Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

240V Power Connections and Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Low Voltage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Simulator Main Power Switch and Start Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Simulator Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

The Flight Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Computer and Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Computer, UPS, and Sound Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Intercom and Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Visual System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Visual System Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Visual Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Projector Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Projector Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Projection Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Simulator Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Seat Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Safety Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Flight Deck Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Flight Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Overhead Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Aft Overhead Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Forward Overhead Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Glareshield Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Main Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Centre Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

CDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Control Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Aft Electronic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Overhead Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Aft Overhead Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Forward Overhead Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Glareshield Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

EFIS Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Mode Control Panel (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Oxygen Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Main Instrument Panel and Flight Display Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Control Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Aft Electronic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Flight Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Control Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

4 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SIMULATOR GENERAL
This section of the PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual includes descriptions of the Simulator Systems.

Note that this section of the manual provides descriptions of the systems represented in the PS4.5 Simulator.
Refer to Section 5 - PS4.5 Operating Procedures for instructions of how to operate the device using these
systems.

WARNING - The systems and descriptions in this section of the manual are for use with ProJet PS4.5
simulators and are not to be used for real-world operations or for operating any real aircraft. Failure to follow
this warning could result in injury or death.

The ProJet PS4.5 Device Exterior

2
1
3

1. Instructor Box
2. Projection System (underneath Tent)
3. Simulator Tent
4. Visuals Screen (underneath Tent)

5 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Software
The following includes the primary software components/equipment of the ProJet PS4.5 device:
• Simulator Platform Software - Prosim Aviation Research B.V.
• Instructors Operating Station (IOS) Software - Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd.
• Operating System - Microsoft Windows 7.
• Simulation Engine - Lockheed Martin Prepar3d.
• Avionics and Glass Cockpit Software - Prosim Aviation Research B.V.

Flight Model/Handling Characteristics


The Flight Model resembles the handling characteristics of a single-aisle generic twin-engine jet aircraft.

Electrical System
The Simulator requires a 240V AC 50/60Hz, Single Phase, 20 amp connection.
The Simulator Electrical System is certified to meet required electrical compliance and consists of:
• 240V High Voltage System.
• 24V Low Voltage System for rise/fall seat system and Stick Shakers.
• 12V Low Voltage System for motorisation and IO.
• 5V Low Voltage system for IO.

240V Power Connections and Wiring


WARNING - For maintenance operations only.
1 x 240v fused power connection is located on the left side of the simulator. This connection should remain
connected at all times. The power can switched off to the simulator for emergency by the switch adjacent to the
connection. The green indicator light confirms power is connected to that point. The Simulator Main Power
Switch overrides this connection.
WARNING - It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that the electrical wiring of the simulator is
checked in accordance with all governing authority requirements.










1. 240V Power Indicator Light


2. 240V Power Connection
3. 240V Power ON/OFF Switch

6 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Low Voltage Wiring


There are a number of various low voltage wiring looms and connections. All low voltage wiring is routed away
from the exterior of the simulator.

Simulator Main Power Switch and Start Button


The Simulator Main Power Switch is located inside and to the rear-left of the simulator. This should be used
during the Normal Simulator Start-up and Shut-down Procedure. The switch powers 240v Power to respective
power connections throughout the Simulator.
The Simulator red Start Button is located under the Red Guard (displayed below). This should be pushed during
the Normal Simulator Start-up Procedure. When button is pressed the FS PC will start followed by all other PCs
which run the simulator.
WARNING - Ensure the Projectors are turned ON before pressing the Start Button.


 




 

1. Simulator Main Power Switch


2. Simulator red Start Button (underneath red guard)

Simulator Interior Lighting


The interior Flight Deck Lighting includes:
• 4 x Dome/Cabin lights (dimmable).
• 2 x Map lights (dimmable).
• Panel Backlighting (dimmable).
Controls for the Captain's and First Officer's overhead Dome and Map lighting are located on the Captain's and
First Officer's Side Consoles, respectively.
Adjust the brightness of the lights by operating the rotary switches. If video recording, be aware of video
camera lighting requirements.

7 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

The Flight Deck

8 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

COMPUTER AND SOUND SYSTEM


Computer, UPS, and Sound Rack
WARNING - The Computer, UPS and Sound Rack should only be accessed for Maintenance Purposes only,
with permission from Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited. Failure to comply with this warning may result in the
cancellation of the Warranty.
This rack consists of:
• 5 x Rack-mounted PCs.
• PC networking hardware.
• KVM switch.
• Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
• Sound System Amplifiers and Mixers.
During Normal Operations, the PC's are started by the Simulator red Start Button in accordance with the
Simulator Start-up Procedure, and Shutdown through the Instructors Operating Station (IOS). The UPS is used to
power the PCs, Sound Rack, Projectors and the Simulator. It should always be connected to 240V Wall/Mains
Power.

 1. Seat Shaker Amplifier


2. Engines/Environment Speakers
  Amplifier
3. Ceiling Speakers Amplifier
 4. KVM Switch


5. INSTRUCTOR (IOS) PC
6. FS (FlightSim/Visuals) PC
7. PSD (Prosim Display) PC

8. PSS (Prosim Systems) PC
9. SIM SEVER PC
 (MUST ALWAYS BE KEPT ON)
10. UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)
(MUST ALWAYS BE KEPT ON)










9 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Sound System

1. The Sound System includes:


• Rack-mounted mixers and amplifiers.
• 2 x Speakers mounted outside the device for engine and environmental sounds.
• 2 x ceiling speakers for cockpit warnings, alerts and ATC sounds.
• Stereo Sound Package includes engine, ground rumbling, landing gear, wind and environmental
sound.
• Four station Pilot Intercom with aviation headsets and Oxygen Masks (front seats only) for crew
communications.
• Seat-Shaker System for both Pilot Seats.
• GPWS and warning sounds (including radio altimeter call-outs, configuration warnings, TCAS alerts
and GPWS warnings).

Intercom and Headsets


The simulator is equipped with a four station Pilot Intercom System for aviation headsets, for crew
communications. This is an open mike system. Each port and volume controls are located next to each seat.
A Phone Intercom System is installed at the rear of the Pedestal Panel, to a Wall Intercom outside the simulator.
To communicate with the station outside the simulator, pick up the handset and talk into it. The Call button on
the Phone System can be used to activate the chime alert on the wall intercom. To communicate from the
outside station with the simulator, press the call button on the wall intercom to sound the chime alert inside the
simulator. Once the operator answers the call, talk into the speaker on the wall intercom.

10 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

VISUAL SYSTEM

Visual System Hardware


The Visual Systems consists of:
• 1 x 180° Curved Screen.
• 3 x DLP High Definition (HD) Data Projectors.
• 3 x Simulation Specific HD Lens systems.
• System Assembly/Structure and Tent.

Visual Software
The Visuals Simulation Engine uses Lockheed Martin's Prepar3D® simulation software.
The Visuals include:
• 180° horizontal FOV and 44° vertical FOV.
• 30 FPS rendering (approx.).
• 5760 x 1080 pixels (6.2 million pixels).
• Edge Blending and Image control Software.
• Global database including over 24,000 accurate airports and surrounds.
• Artificial aircraft traffic.
• Animated airport ground traffic.
• Terrain modelling.
• Day, night, dawn and dusk visuals.
• Selectable special effects, fog, haze, sun glare.
• Taxiway markings.
• Runway edge, runway centreline and taxiway lighting.
• Runway markings including, runway heading indicators, runway centreline, threshold markings and
Touchdown zone.
• Approach guidance and lead-in Lighting.

11 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Projector Operation
Refer to Data Projector manual for full operating, maintenance and safety instructions. The Projector Remote is
located on the shelf at the rear of the cockpit and should never be removed from the simulator.
Using remote:
• Turn Projectors ON: Point at screen and press on/off button.
• Turn Projectors OFF: Point at screen and press on/off button TWICE (follow prompt).
MAINTENANCE - On start-up of Data Projector should the filter require cleaning then a warning message will
display. Clean filter as per instruction manual and reset filter timer. On start-up of Data Projector should the
'Lamp Life' Low Message appear, replace the Projector Lamp Bulbs with an approved replacement. Contact
Pacific Simulators for further details.
WARNING - The data projector MUST be allowed to cool down for a minimum of 5 minutes before shutting
down (if power is to be totally removed) otherwise the life of the bulb will be shortened. The data projectors
have a separate power supply fed from the UPS and this is not effected by turning off the simulator. You will
need to turn off the data projectors manually if there is a power cut before the UPS batteries run out of
power (5 mins approx).

Projector Settings
The following list the recommended Settings for the Projectors:
IMAGE:
• GAMMA MODE: SPORTS
• CONTRAST: 0
• BRIGHTNESS: 0
• COLOR TEMP: USER
• COLOR: 10
• TINT: 0
• SHARPNESS: 2
• BRILLIANTCOLOR: ON
INSTALLATION:
• LAMP MODE: STANDARD
• AUTO POWER OFF: 10 min
WARNING - Projector settings are set by Pacific Simulators and should not be adjusted without consultation
with Pacific Simulators. Projector versions and settings may differ for each specific simulator.

Projection Screen
The 180 degree curved screen will be set in place during the installation and there is no requirement for the
operator to adjust or move this screen.
WARNING - Under no circumstances should the operator touch the Projection Screen. This can result in
dirtying or tearing the screen.

12 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SIMULATOR SEATING

 

Seats
• 2 x Pilot Seats include:
o Adjustable - forward, backwards, rise and fall.
o Arm rests.
o 5-point seat harness.
• 2 x Observer Seats include:
o Fixed seats.
o 1 x seat for Instructors Station Console.

Seat Adjustment
Captain and F/O seats can be adjusted forwards and backwards and are locked in place by an adjustment handle
on the centre console side of the seat.
• To adjust the seat forward, move the adjustment handle to the rear and using the hand grip on the
underside of the top of the front window, pull yourself and seat in and forward. When the seat is in the
desired position, move the adjustment handle back to the locked position.
• To adjust the seat backwards, move the adjustment handle to the rear and using your feet 'push' your
seat backwards and then move the adjustment handle back to the locked position when the seta is in
the desired position.
When adjusting the seat to the extreme rearward position the seat will move sideways away from the centre
console. You should enter and exit the seat while in this position as it gives the most clearance between the seat
and centre console.
The two jump seats are fixed and do not have safety harnesses.

13 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Safety Harnesses
Both Captain's and F/O's seats are fitted with 5 point safety harnesses.
Fitting of the harness should be done in the following manner by clicking in each belt:
1. Secure lap belt.
2. Secure between the legs belt.
3. Secure the shoulder harnesses.
Remove the harness in the following manner:
1. Turn the securing buckle to release each harness.
WARNING - Use caution when releasing the shoulder harnesses as they may retract quickly with the clip
possibly catching your upper body or head if allowed to retract under their own tension. Ensure lap straps
and buckles are kept on the seats and are not handing off the seat when the seat is positioned forward or aft.
Failure to do so may result in damage to Pedestal Panel, Side Panels, and the floor.

14 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

FLIGHT DECK OVERVIEW


Flight Deck

15 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Overhead Panel

16 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Aft Overhead Panel

17 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Forward Overhead Panel

18 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Instrument Panel

19 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Glareshield Panel

20 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Main Instrument Panel

21 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Centre Pedestal

22 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CDUs

23 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Control Stand

24 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Aft Electronic Panel

25 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Side Panels

 

26 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

OVERHEAD PANELS
Aft Overhead Panel

Proximity Switch Elect Unit Light (PSEU)

PSEU light
PSEU light is inhibited from thrust lever advance for takeoff until 30 seconds after landing.
• PSEU (amber) On ground indicates:
1. Fault detected in PSEU.
2. Overwing exit flight lock failed to disengage when commanded.

27 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ELT Switch

ELT Switch
• ARMED (guarded position) Automatically transmits when it reaches its preset G-Load limit.
• ON Manually activates the ELT.

28 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LE DEVICES Panel

LE DEVICES annunciator panel


Indicates position of individual LE flaps and slats. Related LE device in transit when extinguished.

LE DEVICES TRANSIT lights


• TRANSIT Illuminated (amber) if:
1. Any LE device in transit.
2. Any LE device not in programmed position with respect to TE flaps.
3. LE slat skew condition exists (slats two through seven only).
4. During alternate flap extension until LE devices fully extended and TE flap reach
flaps ten.
NOTE: Light inhibited during autoslat operation in flight.

LE DEVICES EXT lights


• EXT (green) Related LE slat in extended (intermediate) position.

LE DEVICES FULL EXT lights


• FULL EXT (green) Related LE device fully extended.

TEST switch
• Push Tests all annunciator panel lights.

29 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

IRS DISPLAY Panel

Data display
Two windows display data for IRS selected with system display selector.
Type of data displayed normally determined by display selector.
Keyboard entry of present position or magnetic heading overrides selected display.
Last digit of each window is for a decimal place (tenths).

DSPL SEL
• TEST (outer) All lights in data display and on mode selector unit momentarily illuminate,
followed by 10 second self-test.
Use only during alignment.
• TK/GS (outer) Left window displays true track (course).
Right window displays present ground speed (knots).
• PPOS (outer) Left window displays present latitude.
Right window displays present longitude.
• WIND (outer) Left window displays present in flight true wind direction.
Right window displays present in flight wind speed (knots).
• HDG/STS (outer) Left window displays present true heading.
Right window displays any applicable maintenance status codes.
During alignment, right window displays minutes remaining until alignment
complete. For alignments greater than 15 minutes, window displays 15 until time
remaining reaches 14 minutes. Display then counts down in one minute intervals.
• BRT (rotate) (inner) Adjusts brightness of data displays.

SYS DSPL selector


• L Displays left IRS for data.
• R Displays right IRS for data.

30 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Keyboard
• Push Alpha keys:
1. Data displays controlled by keyboard when N, S, E, W
(latitude/longitude) or H (heading) keys pushed.
2. Pushing an alpha key arms keyboard for numeric entries.
Numeric keys:
1. Permits manual entry of present position when ALIGN light illuminates.
2. Permits manual entry of magnetic heading with either mode selector in ATT.

ENT key
• Push Enters data into IRS following completion of valid self-test for reasonableness.

ENT light
• ENT (white) Enters N, S, E, W, or H entered.

CLR key
• Push Clears data display of any data not yet entered or accepted. If illuminated, cue lights
extinguish.

CLR light
• CLR (white) ENT attempt fails (entry not accepted by IRS).

31 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

IRS Mode Selector Panel

GPS light
• GPS (amber) Failure of both GPS sensor units.
Failure of a single GPS sensor unit is indicated when illuminated during MASTER
CAUTION recall.
Light extinguishes when MASTER CAUTION system reset.

ALIGN light (L/R)


When extinguished, IRS not in ALIGN mode.
• ALIGN (white) Related IRS operating in ALIGN mode, initial ATT mode, or shutdown cycle.
(white - flashing) Alignment cannot be completed due to IRS detection of:
1. Significant difference between previous and entered positions or unreasonable
present position entry.
2. No present position entry.
NOTE: With mode selector in NAV and alignment complete, all IRS information is available. With mode
selector in ATT, attitude information is available. Heading information is available following entry of
initial magnetic heading.

FAULT light (L/R)


• FAULT (amber) System fault affecting related IRS ATT and/or NAV modes.

ON DC light (L/R)
• ON DC (amber) Related IRS operating on DC power from switched hot battery bus (AC
power not normal).
If on ground, ground-call horn in nose wheel well sounds, providing an alert that a
battery drain condition exists. Illuminates momentarily during normal alignment
self-test.

DC FAIL light (L/R)


• DC FAIL (amber) Indicates DC power for related IRS not normal. If other lights
extinguished, IRS will operate normally on AC power.

32 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

IRS mode selector (L/R)


• OFF Removes all electrical power from system after 30 second
shutdown cycle.
Alignment lost.
• ALIGN Rotating selector from OFF to ALIGN initiates alignment cycle.
Rotating selector from NAV to ALIGN automatically updates
alignment and zeroes ground speed error.
• NAV System enters NAV mode after completion of alignment cycle and entry of present
(detented) position.
In NAV mode, all IRS information available to airplane systems for normal operations.
• ATT Provides only attitude and heading information:
1. Attitude information invalid (attitude flag in view) until ALIGN light extinguishes.
2. Heading information invalid (heading flags in view) until actual magnetic
heading manually entered after ALIGN light extinguishes.
3. Position and ground speed information not available until IRS aligned on ground.
4. Selector must be cycled to OFF before reselecting ALIGN or NAV.

33 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

DOME Lighting

DOME WHITE switch


• DIM Sets cockpit overhead dome lights to low brightness.
• OFF Extinguishes cockpit overhead dome lights.
• BRIGHT Sets cockpit overhead dome lights to full brightness.

34 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SERVICE INTERPHONE

SERVICE INTERPHONE switch


• OFF Deactivates external jacks. Communication between flightdeck and flight attendants
is not affected.
• ON Activates external jacks to service interphone system.

35 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Audio Control Panel

MIC SELECTOR switches


• Illuminated (white) Related switch active.
Push Selects related communication system for subsequent transmission.
Only one switch selected at a time; pushing a second switch deselects the first.
Reception possible over selected system regardless of whether related receiver
switch on.

Receiver switches
• Receiver (white) Related switch active.
switch
• Rotate Adjusts volume.
• 1st Push Allows reception of related communication system or navigation receiver. May
select multiple switches.
• 2nd Push Deselects related system or receiver.

Push-to-talk switch
Spring-loaded to neutral.
• R/T Keys oxygen mask or boom microphone for transmission as selected by transmitter
selector.
• I/C Keys oxygen mask or boom microphone for direct transmission over flight
interphone and bypasses transmitter selector.

MASK BOOM switch


• MASK Selects oxygen mask microphone for transmissions.
• BOOM Selects boom microphone for transmissions.

Filter switch
• V Receives NAV and ADF voice audio.
• B Receives NAV and ADF voice and range audio.
• R Receives NAV and ADF station identifier range (code) audio.

36 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ALT NORM switch


• ALT ACP operates in degraded mode.
• NORM ACP operates normally.

37 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ENGINE Panel

1/2 REVERSER lights


• REVERSER (amber) One or more of following has occurred:
1. Isolation valve or thrust reverser control valve not in commanded position.
2. One or more thrust reverser sleeves not in commanded state.
3. Auto-restow circuit activated.
4. Failure detected in synchronization shaft lock circuitry.

ENGINE CONTROL lights (1/2)


• ENGINE (amber) Engine control system not dispatchable due to faults in system.
CONTROL Light functional when all of the following are true:
1. Engine operating.
2. Airplane on ground.
3. Below 80 kt prior to takeoff or approximately 30 seconds after touchdown.

EEC switch (1/2)


• ON (white) In view:
1. Selects normal control mode.
2. Calculates engine ratings by EEC from sensed atmospheric conditions and bleed
air demand.
3. When ON not in view, EEC manually selected to alternate mode.
• ALTN (amber) In view:
1. EEC has automatically switched to alternate control mode or selected manually.
2. EEC provides rated thrust or higher.

NOTE: Both ON and ALTN in view if EEC automatically switched to soft alternate mode. EGT limits must be
observed in both normal and alternate control modes.

38 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

OXYGEN Panel

CREW OXYGEN pressure indicator


Indicates pressure of crew oxygen cylinder.

PASS OXYGEN switch (guarded)


• NORMAL Drops passenger masks and activates passenger oxygen system automatically if
cabin altitude exceeds 14,000 feet.
• ON Activates system and drops masks regardless of cabin altitude.

PASS OXY ON light


• PASS OXY ON (amber) Masks dropped and passenger oxygen system operating.

39 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Landing Gear Indicator Lights

Landing gear indicator lights


When extinguished, landing gear not down and locked.
• LEFT GEAR/ (green) Related gear down and locked.
RIGHT GEAR/
NOSE GEAR
NOTE: Landing gear warning horn deactivated with all gear down and locked.
Landing gear down and locked as long as at least one green landing gear
indicator light (on the center panel or overhead panel) for each gear
illuminated.

40 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

STALL WARNING TEST

STALL WARNING TEST NO. 1/NO.2 switches


Operates on ground with AC power available. Tests respective stall management yaw damper (SMYD) computer.
• Push (NO. 1) SMYD computer shakes Captain’s control column.
(NO. 2) SMYD computer shakes First Officer’s control column. Vibrations can be felt
on both columns. Inhibited while airborne.

41 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

FLIGHT RECORDER - MACH AIRSPEED WARNING

FLIGHT RECORDER test switch (guarded)


• TEST Powers flight recorder on ground.
• NORMAL Recorder operates:
In flight - Anytime electrical power available.
On ground - Anytime electrical power available and at least one engine is operating.

OFF light
• OFF (amber) Recorder not operating or test invalid due to power failure, loss of input
data, or electronic malfunction.

MACH AIRSPEED WARNING TEST NO.1/NO.2) switches


• Push Tests respective mach/airspeed warning system. Clacker sounds inhibited while
airborne.

42 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Forward Overhead Panel

Fuel Control Panel

ENG VALVE CLOSED and SPAR VALVE CLOSED lights (L/R)


When extinguished, related engine or spar fuel shutoff open.
• ENG/SPAR (bright blue) Related engine, spar fuel shutoff, valve position and engine start
VALVE CLOSED lever, or engine fire warning switch disagree.
(dim blue) Related engine or spar fuel shutoff valve closed.

FUEL TEMP indicator


Indicates fuel temperature in engine #1 tank.

FILTER BYPASS lights (L/R)


When extinguished, fuel filter operating normally.
• FILTER BYPASS (amber) Impending fuel filter bypass due to a contaminated filter.

43 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CROSSFEED VALVE OPEN light


When extinguished, crossfeed valve closed.
• VALVE OPEN (bright blue) Crossfeed valve in transit or valve position and
CROSSFEED selector disagree.
(dim blue) Crossfeed valve open.

CROSSFEED selector
Controls fuel crossfeed valve.
• Open (horizontal) Connects engine #1 and engine #2 fuel feed lines.
• Close (vertical) Isolates engine #1 and engine #2 fuel feed lines.

CTR FUEL PUMPS LOW PRESSURE lights (L/R)


When extinguished, fuel pump output pressure normal or FUEL PUMP switch OFF.
• LOW (amber) Fuel pump output pressure low and FUEL PUMP switch ON.
PRESSURE
NOTE: (with auto shutoff) When both Center (CTR) tank FUEL PUMP switches ON, illumination of both LOW
PRESSURE lights also illuminate MASTER CAUTION and FUEL system annunciator lights. Illumination
of one LOW PRESSURE light illuminates MASTER CAUTION and FUEL system annunciator lights only
on recall. With one CTR tank FUEL PUMP switch OFF, illumination of opposite CTR tank LOW.
(without auto shutoff) When center (CTR) tank FUEL PUMP switches ON, continuous illumination of
one LOW PRESSURE light for ten seconds also illuminates MASTER CAUTION and FUEL system
annunciator lights.

FUEL PUMPS switches (L/R/CTR)


• ON Activates fuel pump.
• OFF Deactivates fuel pump.
NOTE: (with auto shutoff) When center tank fuel pump switch set to OFF, auto
shutoff logic for pump reset. When center tank pump switch set to ON after
being OFF, pump activates until switch set to OFF or auto shutoff logic
deactivates.

AFT/FWD main tank FUEL PUMPS LOW PRESSURE lights


When extinguished, fuel pump output pressure normal or FUEL PUMP switch OFF.
• LOW (amber) Fuel pump output pressure low or FUEL PUMP switch OFF.
PRESSURE
NOTE: When two LOW PRESSURE lights illuminate in same tank, MASTER CAUTION
and FUEL system annunciator lights also illuminate when one LOW
PRESSURE light illuminates, MASTER CAUTION and FUEL system
annunciator lights illuminated only on recall.

44 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

NAVIGATION and DISPLAYS Panel

VHF NAV transfer switch


• BOTH ON 1 VHF navigation source is VHF NAV receiver #1.
• NORMAL VHF navigation source is from default VHF NAV receiver (i.e., receiver #1 for VHF #1
and receiver #2 for VHF #2).
• BOTH ON 2 VHF navigation source is VHF NAV receiver #2.

IRS transfer switch


• BOTH ON L Source for flight instruments attitude and heading is left IRS.
• NORMAL Source for flight instruments attitude and heading is from default IRS.
• BOTH ON R Source for flight instruments attitude and heading is right IRS.

FMC source select switch


• BOTH ON L Left FMC used for all FMC operations. Right map annunciates “FMC L.”
• NORMAL Left FMC controls CDUs and provides input to A/T system.
Right FMC operates in synchronization with left FMC.
Maps displays composite information from both FMCs.
• BOTH ON R Right FMC used for all FMC operations.
Left map annunciates “FMC R.”
NOTE: Moving source select switch causes LNAV and VNAV disengagement.

SOURCE selector
• ALL ON 1 DEU 1 controls all display units.
• AUTO DEU 1 controls Captain outboard, Captain inboard, and upper display units.
DEU 2 controls First Officer outboard, First Officer inboard, and lower display units.
When a DEU fails, other DEU controls all display units.
• ALL ON 2 DEU 2 controls all display units.

45 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CONTROL PANEL select switch


• BOTH ON 1 EFIS control panel 1 controls all displays.
• NORMAL Left EFIS control panel controls Captain’s displays and right EFIS
control panel controls First Officer’s displays.
• BOTH ON 2 EFIS control panel 2 controls all displays.

46 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Flight Control Panel

FLT CONTROL switches (guarded) (A/B)


• STBY RUD Activates standby hydraulic system pump and opens standby rudder shutoff
valve to pressurize standby rudder power control unit.
• OFF Closes flight control shutoff to isolate ailerons, elevators, and rudder from
associated hydraulic system pressure.
• A ON/ Normal operating position.
B ON

FLT CONTROL LOW PRESSURE lights (A/B)


• LOW (amber) Low hydraulic system (A or B) pressure to ailerons, elevator, and rudder.
PRESSURE
Deactivated when associated FLT CONTROL switch positioned to STBY RUD and
standby rudder shutoff valve open.

Flight SPOILER switches (guarded) (A/B)


• ON Normal operating position.
• OFF Closes respective flight spoiler shutoff valve.
NOTE: Used for maintenance purposes only.

YAW DAMPER light


• YAW DAMPER (amber) Yaw damper disengaged.

47 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

YAW DAMPER switch


• ON Engages main yaw damper to main rudder power control unit if B
FLT CONTROL switch in ON position. Engages standby yaw
damper to standby rudder power control unit if both A and B FLT
CONTROL switches in STBY RUD position.
• OFF Disengages main yaw damper.

STANDBY HYD LOW QUANTITY light


• LOW (amber) Low quantity in standby hydraulic reservoir.
QUANTITY Always armed.

STANDBY HYD LOW PRESSURE light


• LOW (amber) Output pressure of standby pump low.
PRESSURE Armed only when standby pump operation selected or automatic standby function
activated.

STANDBY HYD STBY RUD ON light


• STBY RUD ON (amber) Standby rudder system commanded on to pressurize standby rudder
power control unit.

ALTERNATE FLAPS master switch (guarded)


• OFF Normal operating position.
• ARM Closes TE flap bypass valve, activates standby pump, and arms ALTERNATE FLAPS
position switch.

ALTERNATE FLAPS position switch


Functions only when ALTERNATE FLAPS master switch in ARM position. Spring-loaded to OFF.
• UP Electrically retracts TE flaps.
• OFF Normal operating position.
• DOWN Fully extends LE devices using standby hydraulic pressure.
(momentarily)
• DOWN Electrically extends TE flaps until released.
(hold)

FEEL DIFF PRESS light


Armed when TE flaps up or down.
• FEEL DIFF (amber) Excessive differential pressure in elevator feel computer.
PRESS
NOTE: Excessive differential pressure can be caused by erroneous activation of Elevator Feel Shift module.

48 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SPEED TRIM FAIL light


• SPEED TRIM (amber) Failure of speed trim system.
FAIL Failure of a single FCC channel is indicated when MASTER
CAUTION light recall activated. Light extinguishes when MASTER
CAUTION system reset.

MACH TRIM FAIL light


• MACH TRIM (amber) Failure of mach trim system.
FAIL Failure of a single FCC channel indicated when MASTER CAUTION light recall is
activated. Light extinguishes when MASTER CAUTION system is reset.

AUTO SLAT FAIL light


• AUTO SLAT (amber) Failure of auto slat system.
FAIL Failure of a single Stall Management/Yaw Damper (SMYD) computer is indicated
when illuminated during MASTER CAUTION recall. Light extinguishes when MASTER
CAUTION system reset.

49 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

AC and DC Metering Panel

DC AMPS/DC VOLTS display


Displays amps and volts as selected by DC meters selector.

CPS FREQ/AC AMPS/AC VOLTS display


Displays frequency, amps, and volts as selected by AC meters selector.

BAT DISCHARGE light


• ON (amber) Excessive battery discharge.

TR UNIT light
• TR UNIT (amber) On ground, failure of any TR.
In flight, TR1 failed or both TR2 and TR3 failed.

ELEC light
• ELEC (amber) Fault in DC power system or standby power system.
NOTE: Illuminates only when airplane is on ground.

MAINT button
Used by maintenance.

50 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

DC meters selector
• Rotate Displays DC volts amps and volts for the selected item.
• TEST Used by maintenance.

BAT switch (guarded)


• OFF When operating with normal power sources available, removes power from battery
bus and switches hot battery bus.
When battery is only power source, removes power from battery bus, switches hot
battery bus, DC standby bus, static inverter, and AC standby bus.
• ON Provides power to switched hot battery bus. Relays energized to provide automatic
switching of standby electrical system to battery power with loss of normal power.

AC meters selector
• Rotate Displays AC amps and volts and frequencies for the selected item.
• TEST Used by maintenance.

CAB/UTIL switch
• OFF Removes electrical power from galley and cabin equipment systems including:
1. All 115V AC galley busses.
2. Left and right recirculation fans.
3. Fwd and aft door area heaters.
4. Drain mast heaters.
5. Lavatory water heaters.
6. Logo lights.
7. Potable water compressor.
8. 115V AC shaver outlets (when installed).
• ON Supplies electrical power to galley and cabin equipment systems.

IFE/PASS SEAT switch


• OFF Removes electrical power from installed components of passenger seats, in-flight
entertainment systems, and other power systems including:
1. 115V AC audio entertainment equipment.
2. 115V AC video entertainment equipment.
3. Cabin telephone equipment.
4. FAX machine.
5. 28V DC video equipment and passenger seat electronic outlets.
6. 115V AC flightdeck auxiliary power outlets.
• ON Supplies electrical power to installed components of passenger seats, in-flight
entertainment systems, and other power systems.

51 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Generator Drive and STANDBY POWER Panel

DRIVE lights (1/2)


• DRIVE (amber) Integrated Drive Generator (IDG) low oil pressure caused by one of the
following:
1. IDG failure.
2. Engine shutdown.
3. IDG automatic disconnect due to high oil temperature.
4. IDG disconnected through generator drive DISCONNECT switch.

DISCONNECT switch (guarded) (1/2)


Disconnects IDG if electrical power available and engine start lever in IDLE.
NOTE: IDG cannot be reconnected in flight.

STANDBY PWR OFF light


• STANDBY (amber) One or more of following busses
PWR OFF unpowered:
1. AC standby bus.
2. DC standby bus.
3. Battery bus.

STANDBY POWER switch (guarded)


• BAT AC standby bus powered by battery through static inverter.
DC standby bus and battery bus powered directly by battery.
• OFF AC standby bus, static inverter, and DC standby bus not powered. STANDBY PWR
OFF light illuminates (amber).
• AUTO In flight or on ground and AC transfer busses powered:
1. AC standby bus powered by AC transfer bus 1.
2. DC standby bus powered by TR1, TR2 and TR3.
In flight or on ground and loss of all AC power:
1. AC standby bus powered by battery through static inverter.
2. DC standby bus powered by battery.
3. Battery bus powered by battery.

52 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

GRD PWR and BUS TRANS Panel

GRD POWER AVAILABLE light


• GRD POWER (blue) Ground power connected that meets power quality standards.
AVAILABLE

GRD PWR switch


Spring-loaded to center.
• OFF Disconnects ground power from AC transfer busses.
• ON If momentarily moved to ON position and ground power available, previously
connected power (if any) removed from AC transfer busses. ground power connects
to AC transfer busses (if power quality correct).

BUS TRANSFER switch (guarded)


• AUTO Operates BTBs automatically to maintain power to AC transfer busses from any
operating generator or external power. DC cross tie relay automatically provides
normal or isolated operation as required.
• OFF AC transfer bus 1 isolated from AC transfer bus 2 if one IDG supplying power to both
AC transfer busses. DC cross tie relay opened to isolate DC bus 1 from DC bus 2.

TRANSFER BUS OFF lights (1/2)


• TRANSFER (amber) Related transfer bus not powered.
BUS OFF

SOURCE OFF lights (1/2)


• SOURCE OFF (amber) No source manually selected to power related transfer bus or manually
selected source disconnected.
If source selected to power opposite transfer bus, both transfer busses powered.

53 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

GEN OFF BUS lights (1/2)


• GEN OFF BUS (blue) IDG not supplying power to related transfer bus.

APU GEN OFF BUS light


• APU GEN (blue) APU running but not powering a bus.
OFF BUS

GEN switches (1/2)


Spring-loaded to center.
• OFF Disconnects IDG from related AC transfer bus by opening generator circuit breaker.
• ON Connects IDG to related AC transfer bus by disconnecting previous power source
and closing generator circuit breaker.

APU GEN switches (L/R)


Spring-loaded to center.
• OFF When APU generator powering both AC transfer busses:
1. Moving a single APU GEN switch to OFF illuminates related SOURCE OFF light.
APU continues to power AC transfer busses.
2. Subsequently moving other APU GEN switch to OFF disconnects APU generator
from tie bus and removes APU power from AC transfer busses.
When APU generator powering one AC transfer bus and IDG powering one AC
transfer bus:
1. Moving related APU GEN switch to OFF disconnects APU generator from tie bus
and AC transfer bus.
2. IDG powers AC transfer busses.
• ON When neither AC transfer bus powered by IDG, moving a single APU GEN switch to
ON:
1. Both AC transfer busses connected to APU generator.
2. Disconnects external power, if connected.
3. Opposite SOURCE OFF light illuminates until other APU GEN switch moved to
ON.
When both AC transfer busses powered by IDGs, moving an APU GEN switch ON:
1. Related AC transfer bus powered from APU generator.
2. Other AC transfer bus continues to receive power from IDG.

54 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

APU Panel

APU MAINT light


• MAINT (blue) APU maintenance problem exists. APU may be operated. Light disarmed when
APU switch in OFF position.

APU LOW OIL PRESSURE light


• LOW OIL (amber) Oil pressure low causing an automatic shutdown (after cycle completes).
PRESSURE
NOTE: If light illuminates when APU switch is placed to OFF, light extinguishes after five minutes. Light
disarmed when APU switch is in OFF position.

APU FAULT light


• FAULT (amber) Malfunction exists causing APU to initiate an automatic shutdown.
NOTE: If light illuminates when APU switch is placed to OFF, light extinguishes after five minutes. Light
disarmed when APU switch is in OFF position.

APU OVERSPEED light


• OVERSPEED Illuminated (amber) if following indicated:
1. APU RPM limit exceeded resulting in an automatic shutdown.
2. Overspeed shutdown protection feature failed a self-test during a normal APU
shutdown.
NOTE: If light illuminates when APU switch is placed to OFF, light extinguishes after five minutes. Light
disarmed when APU switch in OFF position.

APU EGT indicator


• EGT Indicates EGT of APU. Remains powered for five minutes after shutdown.

55 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Windshield WIPER Selector Panel

Windshield WIPER selector (L/R)


• PARK Turns off wiper motors and stows blades.
• INT Intermittent operation (seven second cycle).
• LOW Low speed operation.
• HIGH High speed operation.

56 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Call System

ATTEND switch
• Push Two-tone chime sounds in passenger cabin.
Illuminates (pink) both master call lights in the cabin.

GRD CALL switch


• Push Horn sounds in nose wheel well until released.

Flightdeck CALL light


• CALL (blue) Flightdeck being called by flight attendants or ground crew.

57 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Passenger Signs

NO SMOKING switch
Illuminates NO SMOKING signs in cabin when ON.
NOTE: Most operators leave this switch in the ON position full time so the NO SMOKING lights remain on at
all times. Many operators will rapidly move the switch from ON to OFF and back to ON when passing
through 10,000 feet. This is to notify the flight attendants it is safe to use electronic devices.

FASTEN BELTS switch


• OFF Extinguishes FASTEN SEAT BELTS and RETURN TO SEAT signs.
• AUTO Illuminates or extinguishes FASTEN SEAT BELTS and RETURN TO SEAT signs
automatically depending on airplane configuration.
• ON Illuminates FASTEN SEAT BELTS and RETURN TO SEAT signs.

58 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

EMER EXIT LIGHTS

EMER EXIT LIGHTS NOT ARMED light


• NOT ARMED (amber) EMER EXIT LIGHTS switch not in ARMED position.

EMER EXIT LIGHTS switch (guarded)


• OFF Prevents emergency lights system operation if airplane electrical power fails or
turned off.
• ARMED Illuminates all emergency lights automatically if airplane electrical power to DC bus
#1 fails or AC power turned off.
• ON Illuminates all emergency lights.

59 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

EQUIPMENT COOLING Panel

SUPPLY switch
• NORM Activates normal cooling supply fan.
• ALTN Activates alternate cooling supply fan.

SUPPLY OFF light


• OFF (amber) No airflow from selected cooling supply fan.

EXHAUST switch
• NORM Activates normal cooling exhaust fan.
• ALTN Activates alternate cooling exhaust fan.

EXHAUST OFF light


• OFF (amber) No airflow from selected cooling exhaust fan.

60 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LAVATORY SMOKE Light

LAVATORY SMOKE light


• SMOKE (amber) Illuminates when smoke is detected in a lavatory. May also illuminate if a
test is being conducted.

61 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CIRCUIT BREAKER and PANEL Lighting

CIRCUIT BREAKER light control


• Rotate Controls brightness of light to the P-6 and P-18 circuit breaker panels.

PANEL light control


• Rotate Controls brightness of light to the forward and aft overhead panel.

62 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

WINDOW and PROBE HEAT Panel

WINDOW OVERHEAT lights (L/R)


• OVERHEAT (amber) Overheat condition.
NOTE: OVERHEAT lights also illuminate if electrical power to window(s) interrupted.

WINDOW HEAT ON lights (L/R)


When extinguished, window heat not in use if:
1. Switch OFF.
2. Overheat detected.
3. System failure has occurred.
4. System at correct temperature.
• ON (green) Window heat applied to selected windows.

WINDOW HEAT switches (L/R)


• ON Applies window heat to selected windows.
• OFF Removes window heat to selected windows.

WINDOW HEAT TEST switch


Spring-loaded to neutral.
• OVHT Simulates overheat condition.
• PWR TEST Provides confidence test.

PROBE HEAT lights (L/R)


• Illuminated (amber) Related probe not heated.
NOTE: If operating on standby power, probe heat lights do not indicate system status.

63 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PROBE HEAT switches (L/R)


• ON Applies probe heat to related system.
• OFF Removes probe heat to related system.

64 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

WING and ENG ANTI-ICE Panel

WING ANTI-ICE L/R VALVE OPEN lights


• L/R VALVE (bright blue) Related wing anti-ice control valve in transit, or related wing
OPEN anti-ice control valve position disagrees with WING ANTI-ICE switch position.
(dim blue) Related wing anti-ice control valve open (switch ON).
• Extinguished Related wing anti-ice control valve closed (switch OFF).

WING ANTI-ICE switch


• OFF Closes wing anti-ice control valves.
• ON In flight, opens wing anti-ice control valves. Stick shaker logic set for icing conditions.
NOTE: Stick shaker logic remains set for icing conditions for remainder of flight,
regardless of subsequent WING ANTI-ICE switch position.

On ground, opens wing anti-ice control valves if thrust on both engines below takeoff
warning setting and temperature inside both distribution ducts below thermal
switch activation temperature.
Closes control valves if either engine thrust is above takeoff warning setting or
thermal switch activated in either distribution duct. Switch remains ON. Switch trips
OFF at lift-off.

COWL ANTI-ICE lights (1/2)


• COWL (amber) Indicates overpressure condition in duct downstream of engine cowl
ANTI-ICE anti-ice valve.

COWL VALVE OPEN lights (1/2)


• COWL VALVE (bright blue) Related cowl anti-ice valve in transit or cowl anti-ice valve position
OPEN disagrees with related ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch position.
(dim blue) Related cowl anti-ice valve open (switch ON).
• Extinguished Indicates related cowl anti-ice valve closed (switch OFF).

ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch (1/2)


• ON Opens related engine anti-ice valve. Stick shaker logic set for icing conditions.
• OFF Closes related engine anti-ice valve. Stick shaker logic returns to normal when
wing anti-ice not used in flight.

65 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Hydraulic Panel

ELEC HYD PUMPS OVERHEAT lights (1/2)


• OVERHEAT (amber) Overheat in the hydraulic pump or the hydraulic fluid used to cool and
lubricate corresponding electric motor driven pump.

HYP PUMPS LOW PRESSURE lights (1/2/3/4)


• LOW (amber) Low output pressure in associated pump.
PRESSURE
NOTE: When engine fire switch pulled, LOW PRESSURE light deactivated.

ENG HYD PUMPS switches (1/2) (A/B)


• ON De-energizes locking valve in pump to allow pump pressure to enter system.
NOTE: Leave ON at shutdown to prolong solenoid life.

• OFF Energizes blocking valve to block pump output.

ELEC HYD PUMPS switches (1/2) (A/B)


• ON Provides power to associated electric motor-driven pump.
• OFF Removes electrical power from pump.

66 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Exterior Door Annunciator Lights

Exterior door annunciations


• Illuminated (amber) Related door not closed and locked.

67 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER

Area microphone
Active anytime 115V AC applied to airplane.

Status indicator
Extinguished when button released.
• Illuminated Indicates test completed successfully.

ERASE button
• Push Erases all four channels. Operative only when airplane on ground and parking brake
(2 seconds) set.

TEST button
• Push (green) Tests all four cockpit voice recorder channels (one per second).
(5 seconds)

HEADSET jack
Headset may be plugged into jack to monitor tone transmission during test or to monitor playback of voice
audio.

68 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CABIN ALT Panel

CABIN ALT DIFF PRESS indicator


• Inner scale Displays cabin altitude in feet.
• Outer scale Displays differential pressure between cabin and ambient in psi.
CABIN CLIMB rate indicator
Indicates cabin rate of climb or descent in feet per minute.

ALT HORN CUTOUT switch


• Push Silences intermitting cabin altitude warning horn.
NOTE: Altitude warning horn sounds when cabin reaches 10,000 feet altitude.

69 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LANDING Lights

RETRACTABLE LANDING light switches (L/R)


• RETRACT Retracts and extinguishes retractable landing lights.
• EXTEND Extends and extinguishes retractable landing lights.
• ON Extends and illuminates retractable landing lights.

FIXED LANDING light switches (L/R)


• OFF Extinguishes fixed landing lights.
• ON Illuminates fixed landing lights.

70 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

RUNWAY TURNOFF and TAXI Lights

RUNWAY TURNOFF light switches (L/R)


• OFF Extinguishes runway turnoff lights located in leading edge of wing root.
• ON Illuminates runway turnoff lights.

TAXI light switch


• OFF Extinguishes nose wheel well taxi light.
• ON Illuminates nose wheel well taxi light.

71 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

APU Switch

APU switch
• OFF Normal position when APU not running.
1. Positioning switch to OFF with APU running trips APU generator off bus(es), if
connected, and closes APU bleed air valve. APU continues to run for a 60 second
cooling period.
2. APU air inlet door automatically closes after shutdown.
• ON Normal position when APU running.
• START Positioning APU switch from OFF to START and releasing it to ON initiates an
(momentary) automatic start sequence.

72 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ENGINE START

ENGINE START switches (1/2)


• GRD Opens start valve.
Closes engine bleed valve.
For ground starts, arms selected igniter(s) to provide ignition when engine start lever
moved to IDLE.
For in flight starts, arms both igniters to provide ignition when engine start lever
moved to IDLE.
Releases to OFF at start valve cutout.
• OFF Ignition normally off. Both igniters activated when engine start lever in IDLE
and:
1. An uncommanded rapid decrease in N2 occurs.
2. N2 between 57% and 50%.
3. In flight, N2 between idle and 5%.
• CONT Provides ignition to selected igniters when engine operating and engine start lever in
IDLE.
In flight, provides ignition to both igniters when N2 below idle and engine start lever
in IDLE.
• FLT Provides ignition to both igniters when engine start lever in IDLE.

Ignition select switch


• IGN L Selects left igniter for use on both engines.
• BOTH Selects both igniters for use on both engines.
• IGN R Selects right igniter for use on both engines.

73 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Miscellaneous Exterior Lights

LOGO light switch


• OFF Extinguishes logo lights on each side of tail.
• ON Illuminates logo lights.

POSITION STROB light switch (typical configuration)


• STROBE Illuminates (red and green) wing-tip position lights and (white) trailing
& STEADY edge wing-tip lights.
Illuminates (flashing white) wing-tip and tail strobe lights.
• OFF Extinguishes (red and green) wing-tip position lights, white trailing edge wing-tip
lights, and wing-tip and tail strobe lights.
• STEADY Illuminates (red and green) wing-tip position lights and (white) trailing edge wing-tip
lights.

STROBE light switch (alternate configuration)


• OFF Extinguishes (flashes white) wing-tip and tail strobe lights.
• AUTO Illuminates (flashing white) wing-tip and tail strobe lights when weight off wheels.
• ON Illuminates (flashing white) wing-tip and tail strobe lights.

POSITION light switch (alternate configuration)


• OFF Extinguishes (red and green) wing-tip position and (white) trailing edge wing-tip
lights.
• ON Illuminates (red and green) wing-tip position and (white) trailing edge wing-tip
lights.

ANTI-COLLISION light switch


• OFF Extinguishes strobe/rotating beacon lights on upper and lower fuselage.
• ON Illuminates (red) strobe/rotating beacon lights.

74 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

WING light switch


• OFF Extinguishes wing leading edge lights on fuselage forward of
wing.
• ON Illuminates wing leading edge lights.

WHEEL WELL light switch


• OFF Extinguishes three wheel well lights.
• ON Illuminates wheel well lights.

75 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Cabin Pressurization Panel

AUTO FAIL light


• AUTO FAIL (amber) Automatic pressurization system failure:
1. Single controller failure when ALTN light also illuminates.
2. Dual controller failure when illuminated alone.

OFF SCHED DESCENT light


• OFF SCHED (amber) Airplane descended before reaching planned altitude set in
DESCENT FLT ALT indicator.

ALTN light
• ALTN (green) Pressurization system operating in alternate mode:
1. Illumination of both ALTN and AUTO FAIL lights indicates a single controller
failure and automatic transfer to ALTN mode.
2. Pressurization mode selector in ALTN position.

MANUAL light
• MANUAL (green) Pressurization system operating in manual mode.

FLT ALT indicator


Indicates selected cruise altitude. Normally, set before takeoff.

FLT ALT selector


• Rotate Sets planned cruise altitude (-1,000 ft. to 42, 000 ft.) in 500 ft. increments.

76 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LAND ALT indicator


Indicates altitude of intended landing field. Normally, set before takeoff.

LAND ALT selector


• Rotate Selects planned landing field altitude (-1,000 ft. to 14,000 ft. in 50
ft. increments).

Outflow VALVE position indicator


Indicates position of outflow valve. Operates in all modes.

Outflow VALVE switch


Spring-loaded to center.
• CLOSE Outflow valve electrically closes with pressurization mode selector in MAN position.
• OPEN Outflow valve electrically opens with pressurization mode selector in MAN position.
NOTE: Monitor outflow valve progress and position on the Outflow Valve Position Indicator.

Pressurization mode selector


• AUTO Pressurization controlled automatically.
• ALTN Pressurization controlled using ALTN controller.
• MAN Pressurization controlled manually by outflow valve switch. Bypasses both auto
controllers.

77 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Air Conditioning Controls and Indicators


(bottom half)

DUAL BLEED light


• DUAL BLEED (amber) APU bleed air valve open and engine #1 BLEED air switch ON or engine #2
BLEED air switch ON.
APU bleed air valve and isolation valve open.

RAM DOOR FULL OPEN lights (L/R)


• RAM DOOR (blue) Ram door in full open position.
FULL OPEN

RECIRC FAN switch (L/R)


• OFF Disables fan.
• AUTO In flight recirculation fan operates if both packs operating:
Left - Unless at least one PACK switch in HIGH.
Right - Unless both Pack switches in HIGH.

Bleed air DUCT PRESSURE indicator


Indicates pressure in left and right bleed air ducts.

78 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Wing body OVHT TEST switch


• Push Tests wing-body overheat detector circuits and both WING BODY
OVERHEAT lights illuminate (amber).

Air conditioning PACK switches (L/R)


• OFF Disables pack.
• AUTO With both packs operating, regulates each pack to low flow.
With one pack operating, regulates each pack to high flow in flight with flaps up.
With one pack operating from APU (both engine BLEED air switches OFF), regulates
to high flow.
• HIGH Regulates pack to high flow.
Provides maximum flow rate on ground with APU BLEED air switch ON.

ISOLATION VALVE switch


• OPEN Opens isolation valve.
• AUTO (opens) If either engine BLEED air or air conditioning PACK switch positioned OFF.
(closes) If both engine BLEED air switches ON and both air conditioning PACK
switches AUTO or HIGH.
• CLOSE Closes isolation valve.

PACK TRIP OFF lights (L/R)


• PACK TRIP OFF (amber) Pack temperature exceeded limits.
Related pack valve automatically closes and mix valves drill full cold. Requires reset.

WING BODY OVERHEAT lights (L/R)


• WING BODY Overheat from bleed air duct leak in one or more of the respective sections:
OVERHEAT (amber) Left:
1. Engine strut Inboard wing leading edge.
2. Air conditioning bay.
3. Keel beam.
4. APU bleed air duct.
(amber) Right:
1. Engine strut.
2. Inboard wing leading edge.
3. Air conditioning bay.

BLEED TRIP OFF lights (L/R)


• BLEED TRIP (amber) Excessive engine bleed air temperature or pressure related engine bleed air
OFF valve closed automatically. Requires reset.

79 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TRIP RESET switch


• Push If fault condition corrected:
1. Resets BLEED TRIP OFF, PACK, and ZONE TEMP lights.
NOTE: Lights remain illuminated (amber) until reset.

2. Opens related engine bleed valve opens, pack valve, or air


mix valve.

Engine BLEED air switches (1/2)


• ON Opens engine bleed air valve while engines operating.
• OFF Closes engine bleed air valve.

APU BLEED air switch


• ON Opens APU bleed air valve while engines operating.
• OFF Closes APU bleed air valve.

80 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Air Conditioning Controls and Indicators

AIR TEMP indicator


Indicates temperature at location selected with AIR TEMP source selector.

AIR TEMP source selector


• SUPPLY DUCT Selects appropriate zone supply duct temperature.
• PASS CAB Selects forward or aft passenger cabin temperature.
• PACK Selects left or right pack temperatures.

TRIM AIR switch


• ON Regulates trim air pressure by opening shutoff valve.
• OFF Regulates trim air pressure by closing shutoff valve.

ZONE TEMP lights (CONT/FWD/AFT)


Extinguished when Master Caution is reset.
• ZONE TEMP (amber) Duct temperature overheat in CONT CAB or failure of flight deck primary
and standby temperature control.
Duct temperature overheat in FWD CAB or AFT CAB.
During Master Caution light recall:
(amber) Failure of flightdeck primary or standby temperature control in CONT CAB.
Failure of associated zone temperature control in FWD CAB or AFT CAB.

81 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Temperature selectors (CONT/FWD/AFT)


• AUTO Provides automatic temperature control for associated zones.
• C/W Manually sets desired temperature.
• OFF Closes associated trim air modulating valve.
• AUTO Left recirculation fan operates unless both PACK
(grounded) switches in HIGH.
Right recirculation fan operates even if both PACK switches in HIGH.

82 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Cockpit Voice Recorder Switch

VOICE RECORDER SWITCH


• AUTO Powers the cockpit voice recorder from first engine start until 5 minutes after last
engine shutdown.
• ON Powers the cockpit voice recorder until first engine start, then trips the switch to
AUTO.

83 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

84 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

GLARESHIELD PANEL
EFIS Control Panels

EFIS Control Panel (L/R)

MINS selector
• RADIO (outer) Selects radio altitude as minimums reference.
• BARO (outer) Selects barometric altitude as minimums reference.
• Rotate (middle) (slew) Adjusts barometric (BARO) minimums.
• RST (inner) First push displays BARO minimums.
Second push removes BARO minimums.

FPV switch
• 1st Push Displays flight path vector on attitude indicator.
• 2nd Push Removes flight path vector from attitude indicator.

MTRS switch
• 1st Push Displays altitude indications in meters (above indications displayed in feet).
• 2nd Push Displays altitude indications in feet only.

BARO selector
• IN (outer) Selects inches of mercury as barometric altitude reference.
• HPA (outer) Selects hectopascals as barometric altitude reference.
• Rotate (middle) (slew) Adjusts barometric altitude setting on altimeter, or if STD displayed,
adjusts preselected barometric altitude.
• STD (inner) First push selects standard barometric setting (29.92 inches Hg/1013 HPA)
and displays STD underneath altitude tape.
Second push removes STD and displays preselected barometric altitude.

VOR1/ADF1 and VOR2/ADF2 switches


• VOR Displays selected VOR bearing pointer, source, and DME.
• OFF Removes VOR or ADF displays.
• ADF Displays selected ADF pointer and source.
NOTE: VOR or ADF information displayed on RDMI.

85 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Mode selector
• APP (outer) Displays localizer and glideslope information in
heading-up format.
Displays reference ILS receiver, ILS frequency (or ident),
course, and DME.
• VOR (outer) Displays VOR navigation information in heading-up format.
Displays reference VOR receiver, VOR frequency, course, DME, and TO/FROM
information.
• MAP (outer) Displays FMC generated route and MAP information, airplane position,
heading, and track in a heading-up format.
Displays route waypoints, including active waypoint, within selected range.
Displays VNAV path deviation as appropriate.
• PLN (outer) Displays non-moving, true north up, route depiction.
Airplane symbol represents actual airplane position.
Route step-through allowed using CDU LEGS page.
NOTE: Weather RADAR and TCAS not displayed in PLN mode.

• CTR (inner) Displays full compass


(1st Push) rose (center) for APP, VOR and MAP modes.
NOTE: WX RADAR and TCAS not displayed when APP or VOR modes are in CTR.

(2nd Push) Displays partial rose.

Range selector
• Rotate (outer) Selects display range (in nautical miles) for APP, VOR, MAP, and PLN modes.
• TCF (inner) Displays TCAS information on navigation
(1st Push) display.
(2nd Push) (inner) Removes TCAS information from navigation display.

MAP switches
Buttons select background data to display on MAP, center MAP, and PLN modes. Displays can be selected
simultaneously. Second push removes information.
• WXR Energizes weather RADAR transmitter. Displays weather RADAR returns in MAP,
center MAP, VOR, and APP modes. When 640 NM range is selected, weather RADAR
returns limited to 320 NM.
• STA Displays all FMC database navigation aids if on map scales 5, 10, 20 or 40 NM. Only
high altitude navigation aids are displayed on map scales greater than 40 NM.
Displays FMC database high altitude navigation aids on map scales 80, 160, 320 or
640 NM.
• WPT Displays waypoints in FMC database not in flight plan route if selected range is 40
NM or less.
• ARPT Displays all airports stored in FMC database and within viewable map area.
• DATA Displays altitude constraint, if applicable, and estimated time of arrival for each
active route waypoint.

86 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

• POS Displays ADIRU positions as white stars.


Displays FMC position as white circular symbol with left
and right carat.
Displays raw data VOR radials as solid green lines that
extend to DME distance to stations tuned on CDU NAV
RADIO page.
• TERR Displays GPWS generated terrain data in MAP, center MAP, VOR, and APP modes.

87 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Mode Control Panel (MCP)

Lateral and Vertical Navigation Panel (Left Half)

COURSE selector
• Rotate Sets course in COURSE display for related VHF NAV receiver, AFDS and DU.
NOTE: In VOR LOC or APP mode, A A/P and Captain’s F/D use selected course and navigation data from #1
VHF NAV receiver. Different courses and frequencies on two VHF NAV receivers can cause
disagreement between Captain and First Officer’s displays and affect A/P operation.

F/D
• Left Activates command bars on Captain’s attitude indicator.
• Right Activates command bars on First Officer’s attitude indicator.
• ON In flight with A/P ON and F/Ds OFF, turning F/D switch ON engages F/D in currently
selected A/P mode.
Displays FD in A/P status if A/P OFF or engaged in CWS.
Displays command bars if command pitch and/or roll modes engaged.
On ground, arms pitch and roll modes for engagement in TO/GA and wings level
when TO/GA switch pushed.
• OFF Retracts command bar from related attitude indicator.
MA light
If F/D switch ON, light indicates which FCC is controlling F/D modes. When extinguished, F/D modes controlled
from opposite FCC.
• MA (green or white depending on SN) Related FCC controlling F/D modes.
• Both Each FCC controlling modes for related F/D.
illuminated

A/T ARM
• ARM Arms A/T for engagement. Magnetically held at ARM. When armed, A/T engages
automatically when following AFDS modes engaged:
1. LVL CHG.
2. ALT ACQ.
3. V/S.
4. VNAV.
5. ALT HOLD.
6. G/S capture.
7. TO/GA.
NOTE: Indicator light illuminates (green) when A/T ARM switch is in ARM position.

• OFF Disengages A/T and prevents A/T engagement.

88 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

N1
• Engaged (green) A/T maintains thrust at N1 limit selected from
FMC CDU. N1 mode engaged manually by pushing N1
switch if N1 mode is compatible with existing AFDS
modes. N1 mode engages automatically when:
1. Engaging LVL CHG in climb (except during inhibit period for 2 1/2 minutes after
lift-off).
2. Engaging VNAV in climb.

SPEED controls
Display
• IAS/MACH Displays speed selected by IAS/MACH selector.
Display range:
1. 100 KIAS - Vmo in 1 knot increments.
2. .60M - Mmo in.01M increments.
Display blank when:
1. VNAV mode engaged (except when SPD INTV used).
2. A/T engaged in FMC SPD mode.
3. During two engine AFDS go-around. 100 knots displayed when power is first
applied.
Underspeed Limiting - (flashing “A”) Minimum speed.
Overspeed Limiting - (flashing “8”) indicates speed exceeds:
1. Vmo or Mmo limit.
2. Landing gear limit.
3. Flap limit.
NOTE: Overspeed or underspeed limiting symbol appears when commanded
speed cannot be reached.

C/O
• Push Changes IAS/MACH display between IAS and MACH. Automatic changeover occurs at
approximately FL260.
VNAV
When VNAV engaged, FMC commands AFDS pitch and A/T to fly vertical profile selected on FMC CDUs. Profile
includes climb, cruise, and descent speeds and can also include waypoint altitude constraints.
• 1st Push (green) Illuminates VNAV switch and engages VNAV.
Pitch mode annunciates VNAV SPD, VNAV PTH, or VNAV ALT.
A/T mode annunciates FMC SPD, N1, RETARD, or ARM.
IAS/MACH display blanks and airspeed cursor positions to FMC commanded
airspeed.
• 2nd Push Disengages VNAV.
SPD INTV
• 1st Push With VNAV engaged, IAS/MACH display unblanked, FMC speed intervention active,
FMC target speed displayed, and IAS/MACH selector used to set desired speed.
• 2nd Push Blanks IAS/MACH display, FMC target speed active, and FMC computed speed
displays on airspeed indicator.

89 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Selector
• Rotate Sets speed in IAS/MACH display and positions airspeed
cursor on PGD.
Selected speed is reference speed for AFDS and A/T.
Not operative when IAS/MACH display is blank.
SPEED
A/T holds speed in IAS/MACH display or a performance or limit speed. Speed mode engaged manually by
pushing SPEED switch if speed mode is compatible with existing AFDS modes.
Speed mode engages automatically when:
1. ALT ACQ engages.
2. ALT HOLD engages.
3. V/S engages.
4. G/S capture occurs.
NOTE: A/T does not set thrust above displayed N1 limit. A/T can exceed N1 value manually set by N1
Manual Set Knob.
• 1st Push Engages A/T in SPEED mode if compatible with
AFDS modes already engaged, SPEED switch light illuminates (green), and MCP SPD
A/T mode annunciated.
Speed maintained in MCP IAS/MACH display.
• 2nd Push Deselects speed mode and extinguishes switch light. Engages A/T in ARM mode.
LVL CHG
LVL CHG mode coordinates pitch and thrust commands to make automatic climbs and descents to preselected
altitudes at selected airspeeds.
LVL CHG mode is inhibited after glideslope capture.
• Push LVL CHG switch light illuminates (green), pitch mode annunciates MCP SPD for climb
or descent, A/T mode annunciates N1 for climb and RETARD followed by ARM for
descent, and IAS/MACH display and airspeed cursors display target speed.
(LVL CHG LVL CHG climb or descent is initiated by:
Mode)
1. Selecting a new altitude.
2. Pushing LVL CHG switch.
3. Setting desired airspeed.
(Climb) A/T holds limit thrust.
AFDS holds selected airspeed.
(Descent) A/T holds idle thrust.
AFDS holds selected airspeed.
(Airspeed) If a speed mode is active when LVL CHG is engaged, this speed is retained as target
speed.
If a speed mode is not active when LVL CHG is engaged, existing speed becomes
target speed.
Speed can be changed with MCP IAS/MACH Selector.

90 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

HEADING controls
Display
• HEADING Displays selected heading.
Selector
• Rotate (outer) Sets maximum bank angle for AFDS operation in HDG SEL or VOR modes.
Selects commanded bank angle at 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30 degrees.
(inner) Sets heading in HEADING display. Positions selected heading bugs on DUs.
HDG SEL
• Push Engages HDG SEL command mode.
Roll commanded to follow selected heading.
HDG SEL annunciates as FMA roll mode and HDG SEL switch light illuminates (green).
(HDG SEL Commands roll to turn to and maintain heading shown in MCP HEADING display:
Command
Mode)
1. Initial selection commands turn in shortest direction toward selected heading
bug.
2. After mode engagement, roll commands given to turn in same direction as
rotation of heading selector.
3. Bank angle limit established by bank angle selector.
4. HDG SEL mode automatically disengages upon capture of selected radio course
in VOR LOC and APP modes (VOR/LOC armed).
LNAV
• Push AFDS roll commanded to intercept and track active FMC route.
Annunciates LNAV as roll mode and illuminates (green) LNAV switch light.
(LNAV Mode) FMC controls AFDS roll to intercept and track active FMC route. Active route entered
and modified through FMC CDUs and can include SIDs, STARs, and instrument
approaches.
LNAV arming criteria on ground:
1. Origin runway in flight plan.
2. Active route entered in FMC.
3. Track of first leg within 5 degrees of runway heading.
4. LNAV selected prior to TO/GA.
- LNAV guidance becomes active at 50 feet AGL.
- Bank angle limited to 8 degrees below 200 feet and 30 degrees above 200
feet AGL.
LNAV engagement criteria in flight:
1. Active route entered in FMC.
2. Within 3 NM of active route, LNAV engagement occurs with any airplane
heading.
3. Outside of 3 NM, airplane must:
- Be on intercept course of 90 degrees or less.
- Intercept route segment before active waypoint.
LNAV automatically disconnects for following reasons:
1. Reaching end of active route.
2. Reaching a route discontinuity.
3. Intercepting a selected approach course in VOR LOC or APP modes (VOR/LOC
armed).
4. Selecting HDG SEL.
5. Loss of capture criteria.

91 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

VOR LOC
• Push AFDS roll commanded to capture and track selected
VOR or LOC course.
Annunciates VOR/LOC armed or engaged as roll mode
and illuminates (green) VOR LOC switch light.
(VOR LOC Pushing VOR LOC switch selects VOR mode if a VOR frequency tuned or
Mode) selects LOC mode if a localizer frequency is tuned.
NOTE: VOR mode provides roll commands to track selected VOR course. LOC mode
provides roll commands to track selected localizer course along inbound
front course bearing.

Selected course can be intercepted while engaged in:


1. LNAV.
2. HDG SEL.
3. CWS R if autopilot engaged in CMD.
NOTE: Capture point is variable and depends on intercept angle and closure rate.
Localizer capture occurs not later than 1/2 dot deviation. Course capture
indicated when VOR/LOC annunciation changes from armed to engaged.

While engaged in VOR or LOC modes:


1. Autopilot A and Captain’s F/D use information from Captain’s course selector
and #1 VHF NAV receiver.
2. Autopilot B and First Officer’s F/D use information from First Officer’s course
selector and #2 VHF NAV receiver.
3. Different courses and/or frequencies for two VHF NAV receivers can cause
disagreement between Captain’s and First Officer’s F/D displays and affect A/P
operation.
NOTE: When a localizer frequency is selected, VHF NAV radios automatically switch
from tail antenna to nose antenna when VOR/LOC annunciated (armed or
engaged). If antenna switching does not occur, LOC mode inhibited.
Localizer backcourse tracking not available.

APP
• Push APP switch light illuminates (green).
Arms AFDS for localizer and glideslope capture.
Arms roll mode annunciates VOR/LOC.
Arms pitch mode annunciates G/S.
Enables engagement of both autopilots.

92 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

(APP Mode) Arms AFDS to capture and track localizer and glideslope
and can be engaged for dual or single autopilot
operation.
NOTE: One VHF NAV receiver must be tuned to an ILS
frequency before approach mode can be
engaged. With one VHF NAV receiver tuned, onside AFDS enabled for
guidance and operation. For dual autopilot operation, both VHF NAV
receivers must be tuned to ILS frequency and both autopilots must be
selected in CMD prior to 800 feet RA.

APP mode operation:


1. Localizer must be captured prior to glideslope.
2. Localizer can be intercepted in HDG SEL, LNAV, or CWS R.
3. 1 CH annunciates in A/P Status Display after localizer capture.
- For single autopilot approach, 1 CH remains annunciated for entire
approach.
- For dual autopilot approach, 1 CH annunciation extinguishes when second
autopilot engages and FLARE armed annunciated.
4. SINGLE CH annunciates in A/P Status Display after localizer capture.
- For single autopilot approach, SINGLE CH remains annunciated for entire
approach.
- For dual autopilot approach, SINGLE CH annunciation extinguishes when
second autopilot engages and ROLLOUT armed and FLARE armed
annunciated.
- SINGLE CH annunciation extinguishes when second autopilot engages and
FLARE armed annunciated.
5. Glideslope capture occurs at 2/5 dot below glideslope.
6. APP switch light extinguishes after localizer and glideslope capture.
After localizer and glideslope capture, APP mode can be disengaged by:
1. Pushing TO/GA switch.
2. Disengaging autopilot(s) and turning off both F/D switches.
3. Retuning VHF NAV receiver.
While engaged in APP mode:
1. Autopilot A and Captain’s F/D use information from Captain’s Course Selector
and #1 VHF NAV receiver.
2. Autopilot B and First Officer’s F/D use information from First Officer’s Course
Selector and #2 VHF NAV receiver.
3. Different courses and/or frequencies for two VHF NAV receivers can cause
disagreement between Captain’s and First Officer’s F/D displays and affect A/P
operation.
NOTE: After localizer and glideslope capture, CWS cannot be engaged by manually
overriding pitch and roll. Manual override of autopilots causes autopilot
disengagement.

93 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Lateral and Vertical Navigation Panel (Right Half)

ALTITUDE controls
Display
• ALTITUDE Displays selected altitude.
Displayed altitude is reference for altitude alerting and automatic level-offs.
With Mode S transponders installed, displayed altitude is transmitted to ATC.
Altitude range is 0 to 50,000 feet in 100 foot increments.
Displays previously selected altitude when power first applied.
SEL
• Rotate Sets altitude in ALTITUDE display in 100 foot increments. V/S mode arms if rotated
while in ALT HOLD at selected altitude.
ALT HLD
• Push Engages ALT HOLD command mode.
Commands pitch to hold uncorrected barometric altitude at which switch was
pressed.
Annunciates ALT HOLD pitch mode and illuminates (green) ALT HLD switch light.
NOTE: ALT HOLD mode inhibited after G/S capture. After ALT HOLD engages, changes in altimeter
barometric settings do not change selected altitude reference.

94 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ALT INTV
• ALT INTV Manually deletes next FMC altitude constrain via altitude
SEL and ALT INTV switch.
• Push Deletes lowest FMC altitude constraint below
(VNAV Climb) selected MCP altitude.
If airplane is currently at FMC altitude constraint, deletion allows airplane to resume
climb. MCP altitude must be set above current altitude.
For each press of switch, one deletion occurs.
If MCP altitude set above current FMC altitude, FMC cruise altitude resets to MCP
altitude. FMC cruise altitude cannot be decreased using ALT INTV switch.
• Push If MCP altitude set above current FMC cruise altitude, FMC resets cruise
(VNAV Cruise) altitude to MCP altitude and initiates cruise climb.
If MCP altitude set below current FMC cruise altitude, early descent initiated. Lower
FMC cruise altitude cannot be entered using ALT INTV switch.
• Push Highest FMC altitude constraint above MCP altitude deleted. If airplane is
(VNAV Descent) currently at FMC altitude constraint, deletion allows airplane to continue descent.
MCP altitude must be set below current altitude.
If all FMC altitude constraints deleted during VNAV path descent, automatic
transition to VNAV speed descent is made.
V/S
With V/S armed, V/S mode engaged by moving vertical speed thumbwheel.
• Push V/S command mode armed or engaged.
Pitch commanded to hold vertical speed.
A/T in speed mode engaged to hold (or attempt to hold) selected airspeed.
Annunciates V/S pitch mode and illuminates (green) V/S switch light.
• (V/S V/S mode commands pitch to hold selected vertical speed and engages A/T
Command in SPEED mode to hold selected airspeed. V/S mode has both an armed and an
Mode) engaged state.
• Engaged Annunciates V/S pitch mode.
Vertical speed display changes from blank to present vertical speed.
Desired vertical speeds selected with vertical speed thumbwheel.
V/S becomes armed if pitch mode is ALT HLD at selected MCP altitude and new MCP
altitude selected (more than 100 feet from current altitude).
NOTE: Vertical speeds can be selected which command flight toward or away from
selected altitude.

V/S inhibited if:


1. ALT HOLD mode active at selected MCP altitude.
2. Glideslope captured in APP mode.
NOTE: V/S mode engages automatically if ALT ACQ mode engaged and a new MCP
altitude selected which is more than 100 feet different from previously
selected altitude.

95 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

VERT SPEED Display


• VERT SPEED Display blank when V/S mode not active.
Displays present V/S when V/S mode engaged with V/S
switch.
Displays selected V/S when V/S set with thumbwheel.
Range is -7900 to +6000 fpm.
Display increments:
1. 50 fpm if V/S is less than 1000 fpm.
2. 100 fpm if V/S is 1000 fpm or greater.
• Scroll wheel DN:
1. (rotate) Sets vertical speed in VERT SPEED display.
2. Rate of descent increased or rate of ascent reduced.
UP:
1. Sets vertical speed in VERT SPEED display.
2. Rate of ascent increased or rate of descent reduced.

Autopilot controls
CMD A/B
• 1st Push Engages A/P and enables all command modes. Displays CMD in A/P status display.
• 2nd Push If not in approach mode, second A/P engaged and disengages first A/P disengaged.
Enables CWS operation.
NOTE: After localizer and glideslope capture during a dual autopilot approach,
CWS cannot be engaged by manually overriding pitch and roll. Manual
override of autopilots causes autopilot disengagement.

CWS engaged displays:


1. CWS P and/or CWS R in A/P status display.
2. Blank in pitch and/or roll mode FMA.
When approaching selected altitude in CWS P, pitch mode engages in ALT ACQ and
ALT HOLD when reaching selected altitude.
When approaching selected radio course in CWS R with VOR/LOC or approach mode
armed, VOR/LOC engages with course interception.
If pitch is manually overridden while in ALT HOLD and control force released within
250 feet of selected altitude, A/P pitch mode engages in ALT ACQ and returns to
selected altitude in ALT HOLD mode.
NOTE: During F/D only operation while pitch or roll commands more than 1/2 scale
from center, pushing CMD A or B switch engages A/P in CWS for pitch
and/or roll and related F/D bar(s) retract.

96 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CWS A/B
• Push Engages A/P.
Engages pitch and roll modes in CWS. Other pitch and
roll modes not enabled.
Displays CWS P and CWS R in A/P status display.
CMD not displayed in A/P status display.
F/Ds, if ON, display guidance commands and FD annunciates in A/P status display.
A/P does not follow commands while in CWS.
Controls A/P pitch and roll by pilot with control wheel pressure.
When control pressure releases, A/P holds existing attitude. If aileron pressure
releases with 6 degrees or less bank, A/P rolls wings level and holds existing heading.
Heading hold feature inhibited:
1. Below 1500 feet RA with gear down.
2. After LOC capture in APP mode.
3. After VOR capture with TAS 250 knots or less.
DISENGAGE
• Pull down Disengages both A/Ps and prevents A/P engagement.
Exposes yellow background.
• Lift up Enables A/P engagement.
Conceals yellow background.

97 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

FIRE WARN and MASTER CAUTION (L/R)

FIRE WARN lights


• FIRE WARN (red) Indicates fire warning (or system test) in engine, cargo, APU, or main gear
wheel well:
1. Fire warning bell sounds.
2. If on ground, remote APU fire warning horn also sounds.
• Push 1. Extinguishes both master FIRE WARN lights.
2. Silences fire warning bell.
3. Silences remote APU fire warning horn.
4. Resets system for additional warnings.
5. Pushing fire warning BELL CUTOUT switch on overheat/fire protection panel
results in same actions.

MASTER CAUTION lights


• MASTER (amber) Fault detected that activates system
CAUTION annunciator light.
• Push 1. Extinguishes both MASTER CAUTION lights.
2. Extinguishes system annunciator light(s).
3. Resets system for additional master caution conditions.

98 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

System Annunciator Lights (L)

System annunciator lights


• FLT CONT (amber) Indicates one of following faults:
• LOW QUANTITY.
• LOW PRESSURE.
• FEEL DIFF PRESS.
• SPEED TRIM FAIL.
• MACH TRIM FAIL.
• AUTO SLAT FAIL.
• YAW DAMPER.
• STBY RUD ON.
• IRS (amber) Indicates one of following faults:
• FAULT.
• ON DC.
• DC FAIL.
• GPS.
• FUEL (amber) Indicates one of following faults:
• LOW PRESSURE.
• FILTER BYPASS.
• ELEC (amber) Indicates one of following faults:
• DRIVE.
• STANDBY PWR OFF.
• TRANSFER BUS OFF.
• SOURCE OFF.
• TR UNIT.
• BATTERY DISCHARGE.
• ELEC.
• APU (amber) Indicates one of following faults:
• LOW OIL PRESSURE.
• FAULT.
• OVERSPEED.
• OVHT/DET (amber) Indicates one of following faults:
• ENGINE 1 OVERHEAT.
• ENGINE 2 OVERHEAT.
• APU DET INOP.

99 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

100 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SIDE PANELS

 

The Side Panels include:


• Map Light Dimmer Selectors - Capt and F/O.
• Dome Light Dimmer Selectors - Capt and F/O.
• Oxygen Masks - Capt and F/O.
• Chart Clipboard - Capt and F/O.
• Chart Holder - Capt and F/O.
• iPad for IOS Control and Charts - F/O side only.

Oxygen Masks
WARNING - The Oxygen Masks do not supply actual oxygen and should not be used in the event of a real fire
or smoke inside the cockpit. The Masks should be used for training purposes only. Use caution when using
the masks to ensure adequate breathing is possible. It is the operator's responsibility to ensure adequate
breathing air is possible. Do not use the masks for extended time periods.
The simulator is equipped with two Oxygen Masks for the Captain's Seat and First Officer's Seat. These do not
supply actual oxygen, but should be used for training exercises requiring the use of Oxygen Masks (such as
during a rapid depressurization event).
The Oxygen Masks are equipped with a microphone for crew communications.

101 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Option 1

Oxygen Mask Regulator Panel (Captain’s and First Officer’s Side Panels)

Oxygen Mask Regulator Test Selector


• PRESS TO TEST Tests positive pressure supply to regulator.
Illuminates OXYGEN MASK REGULATOR ON light.

MASK - BOOM MIC Switch


• MASK Selects Oxygen Mask Microphone for transmissions.
• BOOM Selects Boom Microphone for transmissions.

Oxygen Mask Regulator ON Light


Illuminates ON when Oxygen Mask Regulator is ON.
Illuminates ON when Oxygen Mask Regulator Test Selector is pressed.

Oxygen Mask Regulator ON/OFF Switch (guarded)


Non functional.
Lift guard and select to ON to initiate oxygen flow.
Illuminates OXYGEN MASK REGULATOR ON light.

NORMAL/100% Switch
Non functional.
NORMAL - supplies air/oxygen mixture on demand (ratio depends on cabin altitude).
100% - supplies 100% oxygen on demand.

102 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Oxygen Mask (On Hook Behind Captain’s and First Officer’s Seat)










 

1. Harness (shown stowed)


2. Mask
3. Microphone
4. Breathing tube and microphone cable
WARNING - Do no block Breathing Tube.

Donning Instructions
To don the mask, grasp the Mask from the hook behind the Pilot’s seat:
• Place the mask over the head so that masks overs nose and mouth, and harness sits over the head.
• Adjust straps to fit comfortably.
• Switch Oxygen Regulator ON.

Establishing Crew Communication


To establish crew communications:
• Place Pilot headset over Oxygen Mask and fit to ears.
• Select MASK-BOOM Switch to MASK on Oxygen Mask Regulator Panel.
• Talk into mask and establish communications with other Pilot.

103 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Option 2

Oxygen Flow Indicator


Illuminates with a yellow cross when oxygen is flowing.

RESET/TEST Switch
• Push Activates oxygen flow momentarily to test regulator if mask is stowed.
Retracts OXY ON flag, shuts off oxygen, and shuts off microphone if mask is not
stowed and stowage box doors are closed.

Oxygen Mask Release Lever


• Squeeze and Releases mask from stowage box.
Pull Up Releases OXY ON flag when stowage box doors open.
Initiates oxygen flow.
Initiates mask harness when inflation lever is squeezed.
Shows a yellow cross on flow indicator momentarily as harness inflates.

104 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Oxygen Mask (On Hook Behind Captain’s and First Officer’s Seat)

1. Harness
2. Mask
3. Microphone
4. Breathing tube and microphone cable

Donning Instructions
To don the mask, grasp the mask from the hook behind the Pilot's seat:
• Place the mask over the head so that mask is over nose and mouth and harness sits over the head.
• Adjust straps to fit comfortably.
• Switch Oxygen Regulator ON.

Establishing Crew Communication


To establish crew communications:
• Place Pilot headset over oxygen mask and fit to ears.
• Select MASK-BOOM switch to MASK on Oxygen Mask Regulator Panel.
• Talk into mask and establish communications with other Pilot.

105 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

106 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLIGHT DISPLAY


INSTRUMENTS
NOSE WHEEL STEERING Switch

NOSE WHEEL STEERING switch (guarded)


• ALT Nose wheel steering powered by hydraulic system B.
• NORM Nose wheel steering powered by hydraulic system A.

107 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Clock (L/R)

CHR control
• 1st Push Starts CHR and displays CHR time (in minutes).
• 2nd Push Stops CHR (sweep hand and CHR time stop).
• 3rd Push Resets CHR and blanks CHR time.

TIME/DATE window
Displays hours and minutes when time is selected with TIME/DATE push button. Displays day, month, and year
alternately when date selected with TIME/DATE push button.

Chronograph second hand


Indicates chronograph seconds. Controlled by CHR control.

ET button
Controls elapsed time function.
• 1st Push Displays RUN and starts elapsed time. (ET counter displayed).
• 2nd Push Displays HLD and stops ET.
• RESET Resets ET and blanks all ET displays.
(hold
momentarily)

TIME/DATE button
Controls TIME/DATE function.
• 1st Push Displays UTC time.
• 2nd Push Displays UTC date.
• 3rd Push Displays manual time.
• 4th Push Displays manual date.
NOTE: UTC (time and date from GPS) or MAN (time and date from clock) symbol displayed on upper right of
LCD display.

108 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SET button
Controls setting of manual time and date.
Manual time displayed:
• 1st Push Hours flash. +/– button adjusts hours.
• 2nd Push Minutes flash. +/– button adjusts minutes.
• 3rd Push Runs time.

ET/Chronograph indicator
Displays elapsed time or chronograph minutes. Chronograph display replaces elapsed time display. Elapsed time
continues to run in background and displays after chronograph reset.

+/– button
Used to set manual time and date.
• + Increases value.
• – Decreases value.

109 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

BELOW G/S P-INHIBIT Light (L/R)

BELOW G/S P-INHIBIT light


• BELOW G/S (amber) Below glideslope alert active.
• Push Inhibits ground proximity GLIDESLOPE alert when below 1,000 feet radio altitude.

110 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Display Select Panel (L/R)

MAIN PANEL DUs selector


Selects display on respective outboard and inboard display units:
• OUTBD PFD Displays PFD on outboard display unit. Blanks inboard display unit.
• NORM Displays PFD on outboard display unit. ND displayed on inboard display unit.
• INBD ENG PRI Displays primary engine instruments on inboard display unit. PFD displayed on
outboard display unit.
• INBD PFD Displays PFD on inboard display unit. Blanks outboard display unit.
• INBD MFD Displays PFD on outboard display unit. Blanks inboard display unit. Inboard display
unit remains blank unless system format (SYS) or secondary engine format (ENG) is
selected with MFD switches on engine display control panel.

LOWER DU selector
Selects display on lower display unit.
• ENG PRI Displays primary engine instruments on lower display unit. Blanks upper display unit.
• NORM Display unit normally blank or displays MFD format as selected with MPD switches
on engine display control panel.
• ND Navigation display remains on inboard display unit and lower display unit.

111 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Primary Flight Display (L/R)


Primary Flight Display (PFD)
The outboard and inboard display units (DUs) present all primary flight and
navigation information. In normal operation the outboard DUs serve as the
Primary Flight Display's (PFDs) and the inboard DUs serve as the Navigation
Displays (NDs).
The Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) present a dynamic color display of all the parameters necessary for flight path
control. The displays provide the following information:
• Flight mode annunciator.
• Airspeed.
• Altitude.
• Vertical speed.
• Attitude.
• Steering information.
• Radio altitude.
• Instrument landing.
• System display.
• Approach minimums.
• Heading/track indications.
• TCAS indications.
• GPWS annunciations.

112 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

15

2
9
3

10
4

11
6
12
7
13

14
8

1. Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA)


• Displays current flight modes.
2. Autopilot Flight Director System (AFDS) Status
• Indicates flight director steering commands.
3. Bank Scale/Indicator
• Provides fixed reference for the bank pointer; scale marks are at 0, 10, 20, 30, 45, and 60 degrees.
4. Speed Tape
• The PFD airspeed indication displays air data inertial reference system (ADIRS) airspeed and other
airspeed related information. Indicates current calibrated airspeed in knots.
5. Attitude Indicator/Artificial Horizon
• The attitude indication displays ADIRS attitude information.

113 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

6. Flight Director
• Indicates flight director steering commands.
7. Ground Speed Indicator
Indicates current Mach or groundspeed:
• Displays Mach when airspeed is 0.40 Mach and above.
• Displays groundspeed when airspeed decreases below 0.40 Mach.
• When transitioning from Mach to groundspeed or from groundspeed to Mach, a white box shows
around the numeric value for 10 seconds.
8. ILS Localizer and Glide Slope Pointers and Deviations Scales
The pointer:
• Indicates localizer position relative to the airplane.
• In view when the localizer signal is received.
• Fills in solid magenta when within 2 ½ dots from center.
The scale:
• Indicates deviation.
• In view when the localizer frequency is tuned.
• Expands when the localizer is engaged and deviation is slightly more than ½ dot.
At low radio altitudes with autopilot engaged the scale turns amber and the pointer flashes to indicate
excessive localizer deviation.
Below 1,000 feet AGL, with LNAV engaged and LOC armed, the localizer scale turns amber and the pointer
flashes if the localizer is not captured.
Each pilot's deviation alerting system self-tests upon becoming armed at 1500 feet radio altitude. This
self-test generates a two second LOC deviation alerting display on each attitude indicator.
9. Altitude Tape
• The altitude indication displays ADIRS altitude and other altitude related information.
10. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
Indicates current vertical speed.
11. Radio Altimeter
Displays current radio altitude:
• Displayed below 2500 feet AGL.
• Box highlighted white for 10 seconds upon descent below 2500 feet.
• Turns amber when below radio altitude minimums.
12. Minimums Reference/Altitude
Displays approach minimum reference and altitude set by the MINS selector on the EFIS control panel:
BARO -
• Displayed when selector is set to BARO, minimums are in feet MSL.
• Turns amber and flashes for 3 seconds when airplane descends below selected minimum altitude.
• Changes back to green:
• When passing the selected minimum altitude plus 75 feet during go-around.
• At touchdown.
• After pressing the RST switch on the EFIS control panel.

114 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

RADIO -
• Displayed when selector is set to RADIO, minimums are in feet AGL.
• Blank when an altitude less than 0 feet is selected.
• Turns amber and flashes for 3 seconds when airplane descends below selected minimum altitude.
• Changes back to green:
• When passing the selected minimum altitude plus 75 feet during go-around.
• At touchdown.
• After pressing the RST switch on the EFIS control panel.
13. Barometric Pressure Display/QNH
Indicates the barometric minimums selected on the EFIS control panel:
• Pointer and line turn amber when airplane descends below selected minimum altitude.
• Reset with the RST switch on the EFIS control panel.
After the pointer is set with the BARO position, moving the Minimums Reference selector to RADIO
displays only the pointer.
14. Heading/Track Indicator
Indicates current heading and track. Heading bug (magenta) indicates selected heading on the mode
control panel. Indications on the track displays selected heading reference:
• MAG indicates display is oriented relative to magnetic north.
• TRU indicates display is oriented relative to true north; a white box is displayed continuously around
TRU.
• Transition from TRU to MAG results in a green box around MAG for 10 seconds.
• When TRU is displayed and the airplane descends more than 2000 feet at a descent rate greater than -
800 feet per minute, an amber box is drawn around TRU; the box flashes for 10 seconds, then turns
steady amber.
15. Angle of Attack Indicator

115 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Navigation Display (L/R)

Navigation Display (ND)


The NDs provide a mode-selectable color flight progress display. The modes are:
• MAP.
• VOR.
• APP.
• PLN.
The MAP, VOR, and APP modes can be switched between an expanded mode with a partial compass rose and a
centered mode with a full compass rose.
If a DU fails, automatic display switching ensures critical information remains available to the pilots at all times.
If the system detects an operational failure on an outboard DU, the primary flight display automatically moves
to the inboard DU and the failed outboard DU blanks. The OUTBD/INDB selector no longer has control over that
display unit.

116 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

MAP Mode

5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13
4

14

3
15
2

16

19 18 17

The MAP Mode displays the following:


1. TCAS Annunciations
2. Weather radar annunciations
3. Selected Map Options
4. Active LNAV route
5. Groundspeed
6. True airspeed
7. Current track
8. Heading pointer
9. Magnetic/True reference
10. Selected heading bug
11. Estimated time of arrival at next active waypoint

117 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

12. Distance to next active waypoint


13. Waypoint
14. Track line
15. Position trend vector
16. VOR/ADF Selection, Ident/Frequency, VOR DME
17. Position difference display
18. Airplane symbol
19. MAP source annunciation
20. Weather radar returns (not shown)
21. Wind direction and speed (not shown - under GS/TAS)

118 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

VOR Mode

6 7

8
4

10

11
1

The VOR Mode displays the following:


1. VOR/ADF Selection/IDENT or Frequency/VOR/DME
2. Selected course pointer
3. Selected heading bug
4. Ground Speed/True Airspeed
5. Wind Direction/Speed/Arrow
6. Current heading
7. Magnetic reference
8. Reference VOR Receiver/Frequency or IDENT/Course/DME
9. Track line
10. Course deviation indication and scale
11. TO/FROM indication and TO pointer

119 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

APP Mode

6 7

4 8

10
2

11

The APP Mode displays the following:


1. VOR/ADF Selection/IDENT or Frequency/VOR/DME
2. Selected course pointer
3. Selected heading bug
4. Wind Direction/Speed/Arrow
5. Ground Speed/True Airspeed
6. Current heading
7. Magnetic/True Reference
8. Reference ILS frequency or IDENT/Course/DME
9. Track line
10. ILS Glideslope Pointer and Scale
11. ILS Localizer Deviation Indication and Scale

120 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PLN Mode

The PLN Mode displays the following:


1. Airplane symbol
2. Range circle
3. True North up arrow
4. Active waypoint information
5. Center waypoint

121 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Upper Display Unit


Engine Indications
Engine indications are displayed on the center instrument panel upper DU. If a
failure is detected on the upper DU, the engine indications automatically shift to
the lower DU. In normal operation the lower DU serves as a spare.

7 8

9
10
5
11

3
12
2
13
1
14

15

1. Oil Quantity (OIL QTY) indications


2. Oil Pressure (OIL PRESS) indications
3. N2 RPM indications
4. EGT indications
5. N1 RPM indications
6. Total Air Temperature (TAT) indication
7. Thrust Mode Display
8. Selected Temperature
9. Start Valve Open alert
10. Oil Filter Bypass alert
11. Low Oil Pressure alert
12. Fuel Flow (FF) indications

122 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

13. Oil Temperature (Oil Temp) indications


14. Engine Vibration (VIB) indications
15. Total Fuel Quantity indication

123 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SPEEDBRAKE and STAB OUT OF TRIM Lights

SPEED BRAKE ARMED light


Light deactivated when SPEED BRAKE lever in DOWN position.
• SPEED BRAKE (green) Indicates SPEED BRAKE UP, armed, and valid inputs exist.
ARMED

SPEED BRAKE DO NOT ARM light


Light deactivated when SPEED BRAKE lever in DOWN position.
• SPEED BRAKE (amber) Abnormal condition or test inputs indicated to speed brake load
DO NOT ARM alleviation system when flaps raised.

STAB OUT OF TRIM light


Operates only when autopilot engaged. Remains extinguished when autopilot disengaged.
• STAB OUT (amber) Indicates autopilot not trimming stabilizer properly.
OF TRIM

124 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

A/P, A/T and FMC Alert Lights (L/R)

A/P disengage light


• A/P (red) Indicates any of following conditions:
1. Stabilizer out of trim below 800 feet RA on dual channel approach.
2. ALT ACQ mode inhibited during A/P go around if stabilizer not trimmed for single
A/P operation.
3. Light TEST switch held in position 2.
4. Automatic ground system tests fail.
(flashing red) A/P disengaged. Accompanied by warning tone.
(amber) Light TEST switch held in position 1.
(flashing amber) A/P automatically reverted to CWS pitch or roll while in CMD.
• Push Resets light and cancels warning tone, if active.

A/T disengage light


• A/T (flashing-red) A/T disengaged.
(steady-amber) Light TEST switch held in position 1.
(flashing-amber) A/T airspeed inflight.
• Push Resets light.

FMC alert light


• FMC (amber) FAIL light on CDU(s) illuminates, an alerting message exists for both CDUs, or
test switch in position 1 or 2.
• Push Resets both FMC alert lights.

Light TEST switch


Spring-loaded to neutral.
• TEST 1 (amber) Tests autopilot, A/T, and FMC alert lights.
• TEST 2 (red) Tests autopilot and A/T alert lights.
(amber) Tests FMC alert light.

125 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Master LIGHTS Switch

Master LIGHTS switch


• TEST Illuminates (at full brightness) all system lights on center pedestal, overhead panel,
and most lights on instrument panel.
NOTE: Placing Master Lights switch in TEST will result in a master caution recall.
Any stored fault remains illuminated when switch released.

• BRT Sets all system lights on center pedestal, overhead panel, and most lights on
instrument panel to full brightness.
• DIM Sets all system lights on center pedestal, overhead panel, and most lights on
instrument panel to low brightness.

126 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

YAW DAMPER Indicator

YAW DAMPER indicator


Displays main yaw damper movement of rudder. Pilot rudder pedal inputs not indicated.

127 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Standby Integrated AS/ALT/ATT & HDG Indicator

Integrated Standby Flight Display (ISFD)


The ISFD displays attitude, airspeed, altitude, ILS, and magnetic heading information. It is connected directly to
the auxiliary pitot and alternate static sources. Attitude information is provided by internal inertial sensors. ILS
information is provided by the No. 1 ILS receiver. The display receives its heading information from the same
source as the captain’s primary flight display. Heading information is not available in polar regions.

128 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Standby Radio Magnetic Indicator

HDG warning flag


• In view Compass signal from air data inertial reference system lost.

Bearing pointers
• Narrow pointer Uses signals from VHF NAV receiver #1 or ADF receiver #1.
• Wide pointer Uses signals from VHF NAV receiver #2 or ADF receiver #2.

Bearing pointer #1/#2 warning flags


• In view (VOR mode) RMI power failure. VHF NAV signal unreliable.
(ADF mode) RMI power failure. ADF signal unreliable.

VOR/ADF bearing pointer #1/2 switch


• Rotate Selects VOR or ADF or for respective bearing pointer.

129 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

FUEL FLOW and MFD

FUEL FLOW switch


Spring-loaded to enter RATE position.
• RESET Resets fuel used to zero. Displays fuel used momentarily, decreases to zero, then
(hold displays fuel flow.
momentarily)
• RATE Displays fuel flow to engine.
• USED Displays fuel used since last reset. After 10 seconds, display reverts back to fuel flow.

MFD ENG button


• 1st Push Displays secondary engine indications on lower DU or if lower DU unavailable, on
upper or inboard DU based on position of display select panel selector.
• 2nd Push Blanks lower DU.

MFD SYS button


• 1st Push Displays hydraulic indications on lower DU or inboard DU if MAIN PANEL DUs switch
is placed to INBD MFD position.
• 2nd Push Removes indications from respective DU.

MFD C/R button


• 1st Push Cancels autoland advisory messages.
• 2nd Push Recalls autoland advisory messages.

130 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

N1 SET and SPD REF

N1 SET knob
Spring-loaded to center.
• AUTO (outer) FMC sets both reference N1 bugs based on N1 limit page and takeoff
reference page. Displays reference N1 bugs at active N1 A/T limit.
• BOTH (outer) Allows manual selection of both reference N1 bugs and readouts by turning
N1 SET inner knob. Has no effect on A/T operation.
• 1/2 (outer) Allows manual selection of respective N1 reference bug and readout by
turning N1 SET inner knob. Has no effect on A/T operation.
• Rotate (inner) Positions reference N1 bug(s) and readouts when N1 SET outer knob set to
BOTH, 1, or 2.

SPD REF selector


Sets reference airspeed bugs on Mach/airspeed indicator.
• AUTO (outer) Provides reference FMC airspeeds and gross weight.
• V1 (outer) Allows manual selection of decision speed on ground. In flight, displays
“INVALID ENTRY”.
• VR (outer) Allows manual selection of rotation speed on ground. In flight, displays
“INVALID ENTRY”.
• WT (outer) Allows manual selection of reference gross weight.
• VREF (outer) Allows manual selection of landing reference speed in flight. On ground,
displays “INVALID ENTRY”.
• (outer) Allows manual selection of white bug to desired value.
• SET (outer) Removes digital readout above Mach/airspeed indicator.
• Rotate (inner) Used to manually set appropriate reference airspeed or gross weight when
SPD REF outer selector is not in AUTO. Digital display appears above Mach/airspeed
indicator.

131 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

AUTO BRAKE Control and FLAP Indicator

AUTO BRAKE DISARM light


Extinguishes when AUTO BRAKE select switch set to OFF and auto brake armed.
• AUTO BRAKE Illuminates (amber) if:
1. Speed brake lever moved to down detent during RTO or landing.
2. Manual brakes applied during RTO or landing.
3. Thrust lever(s) advanced during RTO or landing except during first 3 seconds
after touchdown for landing.
4. Landing made with RTO selected.
5. RTO mode selected on ground. Illuminates for one to two seconds then
extinguishes.
6. Malfunction exists in automatic braking system.

AUTO BRAKE select switch


• RTO Automatically applies maximum brake pressure when thrust levers retarded to idle
at or above 90 knots.
• OFF Deactivates auto brake system.
• 1, 2, 3, or MAX Selects desired deceleration rate for landing. Switch must be pulled out to select
MAX deceleration.

ANTI-SKID INOP light


Extinguishes when anti-skid system operating normally.
• ANTI-SKID INOP (amber) System fault detected by anti-skid monitoring system.

FLAPS position indicator


Indicates position of left and right TE flaps. Provides TE flaps asymmetry and skew indication.

LE FLAPS TRANSIT light


Inhibited during autoslat operation in flight.
• LE FLAPS Illuminates (amber) if:
TRANSIT 1. Any LE device in transit.
2. Any LE device not in programmed position with respect to TE flaps.
3. LE slat skew condition exists (slats 2 through 7 only).
4. During alternate flap extension until LE devices fully extended and TE flaps reach
flaps 10.

132 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LE FLAPS EXT light


• LE FLAPS Illuminates (green) if:
EXT 1. All LE flaps extended and all LE slats in extended
(intermediate) position (TE flap positions 1, 2 and
5).
2. All LE devices fully extended (TE flap positions 10 through 40).

133 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Landing Gear Indicator Lights

Landing gear indicator lights


Extinguished when landing gear up and locked with landing gear lever UP or OFF.
• NOSE GEAR, (red) Landing gear not down and locked (with either or both forward thrust levers
LEFT GEAR, retarded to idle, and below 800 feet AGL). Related landing gear in disagreement
RIGHT GEAR with LANDING GEAR lever position (in transit or unsafe).
(green) Landing gear down and locked. Warning horn deactivated.

134 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

LANDING GEAR Lever

LANDING GEAR lever


• UP Retracts landing gear.
• OFF Removes hydraulic pressure from landing gear system.
• DN Extends landing gear.

Override trigger
Bypasses landing gear lever lock to allow retraction of LANDING GEAR lever.

LANDING GEAR LIMIT speed placard


Indicates maximum landing gear speeds.

FLAPS LIMIT placard


Maximum speed for each flap setting.

135 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Hydraulic BRAKE PRESS Indicator

BRAKE PRESS
Indicates brake accumulator pressure.

136 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SPEED BRAKES EXTENDED

SPEED BRAKES EXTENDED light


• SPEED BRAKES (amber) Indicates SPEED BRAKE lever beyond ARMED position in flight and TE
EXTENDED flaps extended more than flaps 10 or radio altitude less than 800 feet. SPEED BRAKE
lever in DOWN detent on ground and ground spoilers not stowed.
NOTE: On ground, SPEED BRAKES EXTENDED light does not illuminate with hydraulic system A pressure less
than 750 psi.

137 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Lighting Controls (Right)

MAIN PANEL control


• Rotate Adjusts brightness of instrument lighting, center instrument panel, AFDS panel
displays, and edge lighting.

INBD DU BRT control


• Rotate (outer) Adjusts brightness on inboard display unit.
(inner) Adjusts weather RADAR and terrain display brightness on inboard display
unit.

OUTBD DU BRT control


• Rotate Adjusts brightness of outboard display unit.

138 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

GPWS Controls

INOP light
• INOP (amber) Indicates GPWS computer malfunction or power loss. Invalid inputs being
received from radio altimeter, ADIRU, ILS receiver, IRS, FMC, stall management
computers, or EFIS control panel.

SYS TEST button


• Push On ground:
1. Illuminates BELOW G/S and GPWS INOP lights.
2. Displays TERR FAIL and TERR TEST on navigation displays.
3. Illuminates PULL UP and WINDSHEAR alerts.
4. Sounds GLIDESLOPE, PULL UP, and WINDSHEAR aurals.
5. Displays TERRAIN display test pattern on navigation displays.
6. Sounds CAUTION TERRAIN aural and displays TERRAIN caution message displays
on navigation displays.

FLAP INHIBIT switch (guarded)


• FLAP INHIBIT Inhibits ground proximity TOO LOW FLAPS alert.
• NORM Arms normal TOO LOW FLAPS alert.

GEAR INHIBIT switch (guarded)


• GEAR INHIBIT Inhibits ground proximity TOO LOW GEAR alert.
• NORM Arms normal TOO LOW GEAR alert.

TERR INHIBIT switch (guarded)


• TERR INHIBIT Inhibits “look ahead” terrain alerts and terrain display.
• NORM Arms normal terrain alerts and terrain display.

139 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

BACKGROUND and AFDS FLOOD Lighting

BACKGROUND light control


• Rotate Controls forward and aft electronic panel lights brightness.

AFDS FLOOD light control


• Rotate Adjusts brightness of lighting directed at AFDS panel.

140 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Lighting Controls (Left)

MAIN PANEL control


• Rotate Adjusts brightness of instrument lighting, center instrument panel, AFDS panel
displays, and edge lighting.

UPPER DU BRT control


• Rotate Adjusts brightness of upper display unit.

OUTBD DU BRT control


• Rotate Adjusts brightness of outboard display unit.

INBD DU BRT control


• Rotate (outer) Adjusts brightness of inboard display unit.
(inner) Adjusts weather RADAR and terrain display brightness on inboard display
unit.

LOWER DU BRT control


• Rotate (outer) Adjusts brightness of lower display unit.
(inner) Adjusts weather RADAR and terrain display brightness on lower display unit
when ND displayed in that location.

141 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

142 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CONTROL STAND
Lower Display Unit
Systems Indications
Engine indications are displayed on the center pedestal panel lower DU. If a failure is
detected on the upper DU, the engine indications automatically shift to the lower DU. In
normal operation the lower DU serves as a spare.

1
2

3 4

6
7

1. HYDRAULIC System QUANTITY indications (white)


Indicates digital percentage (0% to 106%) of hydraulic quantity.
NOTE: Quantity also displayed at each reservoir.

143 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2. HYDRAULIC System PRESSURE indications (white)


Indicates system pressure:
• Normal pressure - 3000 psi.
• Maximum pressure - 3500 psi.
NOTE: When both pumps for a system are OFF, the indication may read hydraulic system reservoir
pressure, normally less than 100 psi.
REFILL Indication (RF) (white) (not shown).
3. Brake Temperature
Indicates a relative value of wheel brake temperature.
• Values range from 0.0 to 9.9.
• Displayed (white) - normal brake temperature range, 0.0 to 4.9.
• Displayed (amber) - high brake temperature, exceeds 4.9.
4. Brake Symbol
Displayed (blank) - indicates any brake less than 2.5.
Displayed (solid white) - indicates hottest brake on each main gear truck, within the rage of 2.5 and 4.9.
Displayed (solid amber) - indicates brake overheat condition on each wheel within the range of 5.0 to 9.9.
Symbol remains until value is less than 3.5.
5. Flight Spoilers (FLT SPLR) (white)
Indicates related (left/right) flight spoilers position:
• Top mark depicts flight spoilers fully deployed.
• Bottom mark depicts the spoilers down.
6. Aileron (AIL) (white)
Indicates related (left/right) aileron position:
• Top mark depicts maximum up position.
• Center mark depicts neutral position.
• Bottom mark depicts maximum down position.
7. Elevator (ELEV) (white)
Indicates elevator position:
• Top mark depicts maximum up position.
• Center mark depicts neutral position when on the ground and trimmed in the green band.
• Bottom mark depicts maximum down position.
NOTE: Elevator neutral position varies with stabilizer position, flap position and Mach. The center index
mark is set for nominal takeoff conditions. With certain airplane nose up trim settings, the pointer
will be somewhat displaced.
8. RUDDER (white)
Indicates rudder position:
• Left mark depicts maximum left position.
• Center mark depicts neutral position.
• Right mark depicts maximum right position.
NOTE: Main and standby yaw damper movement of the rudder are shown on this indicator.

144 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Secondary Engine Indications


Secondary Engine Indications
Secondary engine indications are displayed:
• When CDS initially receives power.
• When selected by the Multi-Function Display (MFD).
• In flight when an engine start lever moved to CUTOFF.
• In flight when an engine fails.
• When a secondary engine parameter exceeds normal operating range.

1 2 3

12 7
8
11

13

9 10 15 14

1. N2 redlines
Displayed (red) - N2% RPM operating limit.
2. N2 RPM indications
Displays N2% RPM
• Displayed (white) - normal operating range.
• Displayed (red) - operating limit exceeded.

145 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3. N2 readouts (digital)
Displayed (white) - normal operating range.
Displayed (red) -
• Operating limit exceeded.
• On ground, after engine.
4. Fuel Flow (FF) readout (digital)
Displayed (white) - fuel flow to engine with FUEL FLOW switch in RATE position (kilograms per hour x 1000).
5. Oil Pressure (OIL PRESS) Readout
Displays engine oil pressure (psi)
• Displayed (white) - normal operating range.
• Displayed (amber) - caution range.
• Displayed (red) - operating limit reached.
6. Oil Pressure (OIL PRESS) pointer
Displays engine oil pressure:
• Displayed (white) - normal operating range.
• Displayed (amber) - caution range reached.
• Displayed (red) - operating limit reached.
7. Low Oil Pressure (OIL PRESS) Amber Band
Displayed (amber) - low oil pressure caution range beginning at red line.:
• Variable depending on N2% RPM above 65% N2.
• Amber band not displayed below 65% N2.
8. Low Oil Pressure (OIL PRESS) Redline
Displayed (red) - oil pressure operating limit.
9. Oil Temperature (OIL TEMP) Readout
Displays oil temperature (degrees C):
• Displayed (white) - normal operating range.
• Displayed (amber) - caution range reached.
• Displayed (red) - operating limit reached.
10. Oil Temperature (OIL TEMP) Pointer
Displays oil temperature (degrees C):
• Displayed (white) - normal operating range.
• Displayed (amber) - caution range reached.
• Displayed (red) - operating limit reached.
11. High Oil Temperature (OIL TEMP) Amber Band
Displayed (amber) - oil temperature caution range.
12. High Oil Temperature (OIL TEMP) Redline
Displayed (red) - oil temperature operating limit.

146 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

13. Oil Quantity (OIL QTY) Readout


Displays usable oil quantity in percent full.
Video is reversed and LO (white) displayed for low oil quantity.
NOTE: Indicated oil quantity may decrease significantly during engine start, takeoff and climb out. If this
occurs, engine operation is not impacted and the correct oil quantity should be indicated during
level flight.
NOTE: An oil quantity indication as low as zero is normal if windmilling N2 RPM is below approximately
8%.
14. Vibration (VIB) Readout
Displayed (white) - engine vibration level.
Video is reversed for high vibration.
15. High Limit
Displays tick mark and thick line.
16. Vibration (VIB) Pointer
Displayed (white) - engine vibration level.

147 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Engine Controls

Forward thrust levers (1/2)


Controls engine thrust. Cannot be advanced if reverse thrust lever in deployed position.

Reverse thrust levers (1/2)


Controls engine reverse thrust. Cannot select reverse thrust unless related forward thrust lever at IDLE.
NOTE: Reverse thrust lever blocked at reverse idle position until related thrust reverser is more than 60%
deployed.
Movement of reverse thrust lever into reverse thrust engages locking pawl, preventing forward
thrust lever from moving. Terminating reverse thrust removes locking pawl and restores forward
thrust lever movement ability.

Engine start levers (1/2)


• IDLE 1. Energizes ignition system through EEC.
2. Electrically opens spar fuel shutoff valve in wing leading edge outboard of pylon.
3. Electrically opens engine-mounted fuel shutoff valve via EEC.
• CUTOFF 1. Closes both spar and engine fuel shutoff valves.
2. De-energizes ignition system.

148 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SPEED BRAKE

SPEED BRAKE lever


• DOWN (detent) All flight and ground spoiler panels in faired position.
• ARMED Arms automatic speed brake system.
Upon touchdown, SPEED BRAKE lever moves to UP position and all flight and ground
spoilers extend.
• 50% If speed brakes deployed beyond 50% position and speed brake load alleviation
feature activated:
1. SPEED BRAKE lever moves to this position.
2. All flight spoilers retract to one-half of maximum position for inflight use.
• FLIGHT Extends all flight spoilers to maximum
DETENT position for inflight use.
• UP Extends all flight and ground spoilers to maximum position for ground use.

149 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PARKING BRAKE

PARKING BRAKE PULL lever


• Forward Releases parking brakes.
• Aft Sets parking brakes when either Captain’s or First Officer’s brake pedals fully
depressed.

PARKING BRAKE set light


Extinguished when parking brake released.
• Illuminated (red) Indicates parking brake set (light operates from battery power).

150 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Trailing Edge Flaps

FLAP lever
Position of flap control valve selected, directing hydraulic pressure for flap drive unit.
NOTE: Position of LE devices determined by selecting TE flap position. Flap lever positions 30 and 40 arm
flap load relief system. Flap lever positions 10, 15, 25, 30, and 40 arm flap load relief system.

FLAP gates
Prevents inadvertent flap lever movement beyond position 1 to check flap position for one engine inoperative
go-around and position 15 to check flap position for normal go-around.

FLAP position indicator


Provides position of left and right TE flaps and TE flaps asymmetry and skew indication.

HORN CUTOUT button


• Push Silences landing gear configuration warning aural indication at flaps up through 10
and above 200 feet RA.
NOTE: The aural indication cannot be silenced with the cutout switch at flaps greater than 10.

151 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

STAB TRIM Switches

MAIN ELEC CUTOUT switch


• NORMAL Normal operating position.
• CUTOUT Deactivates stabilizer trim switch operation.

AUTOPILOT CUTOUT switch


• NORMAL Normal operating position.
• CUTOUT Deactivates autopilot stabilizer trim operation.
Autopilot disengages if engaged.

152 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Stabilizer Trim Wheel

STAB TRIM wheel


• Allows for manual operation of stabilizer.
• Overrides any other stabilizer trim inputs.
• Rotates when stabilizer in motion.
NOTE: To avoid injury, fold handle inside stabilizer trim wheel during normal operation.

STAB TRIM indicator


Indicates units of airplane trim. (green) Band corresponds to allowable range of trim settings for takeoff.

153 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

154 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

AFT ELECTRONIC PANEL


Overheat/Fire Protection Panel

OVHT DET switches


• NORMAL Detection loop A and loop B both active.
• A Only detection loop A active.
• B Only detection loop B active.

ENG OVERHEAT lights (1/2)


• ENG 1/2 (amber) Overheat in related engine.
OVERHEAT
NOTE: MASTER CAUTION and OVHT/DET system annunciator lights also illuminate.

FAULT/INOP and OVHT/FIRE TEST switch


Spring-loaded to center.
• FAULT/INOP Tests fault detection circuits for both engines and APU.
• OVHT/FIRE Tests overheat and fire detection loops on both engines, APU, and wheel well fire
detector.

Engine fire switches (1/2)


• Illuminated (red) Fire in related engine. Unlocks related engine fire switch.
NOTE: Master FIRE WARN lights also illuminate and fire warning bell sounds.

• In Normal position, mechanically locked if no fire signal.


• Up 1. Arms one discharge squib on each engine fire extinguisher.
2. Closes fuel, hydraulic shutoff and engine bleed air valves.
3. Disables thrust reverser.
4. Trips generator control relay and breaker.
5. Deactivates engine driven hydraulic pump LOW PRESSURE light.
6. Allows engine fire switch to rotate.
• Left/Right Discharges related fire bottle.

155 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

WHEEL WELL fire warning light


• WHEEL WELL (red) Fire in main gear wheel well.
NOTE: Master FIRE WARN lights also illuminate and fire
warning bell sounds.

FAULT light
• FAULT (amber) With overheat detector switch in NORMAL, light indicates failure of both
engine detector loops. With switch in A or B, light indicates failure of respective loop
only.
NOTE: MASTER CAUTION and OVHT/DET system annunciator lights do not
illuminate.

APU DET INOP light


• APU DET INOP (amber) APU detector loop failure.
NOTE: MASTER CAUTION and OVHT/DET system annunciator lights also illuminate.

APU BOTTLE DISCHARGE light


• APU BOTTLE (amber) APU extinguisher bottle discharge.
DISCHARGE

BELL CUTOUT switch


Spring-loaded to up position.
• Push 1. Extinguishes both master FIRE WARN lights.
2. Silences fire warning bell.
3. Silences remote APU fire warning horn (on ground only).
4. Resets system for additional warnings.

APU fire switch


• Illuminated (red) Fire in APU. Unlocks APU fire switch.
NOTE: Master FIRE WARN lights also illuminate, fire warning bell sounds, and APU
fire warning horn sounds (on ground only) in main wheel well. APU fire
warning light flashes.

• In Normal position, mechanically locked if no fire signal.


• Up 1. Arms APU extinguisher circuit.
2. Closes fuel shutoff valve, APU bleed air valve, and APU inlet door.
3. Trips generator control relay and breaker.
4. Allows APU fire switch to rotate.
• Left/Right Discharges APU fire bottle.

L/R BOTTLE DISCHARGE light


• L/R BOTTLE (amber) Related fire extinguisher bottle discharge.
DISCHARGE

156 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

EXT TEST switch


• 1/2 Tests bottle discharge circuits for all three extinguisher bottles.

L/R/APU EXT TEST lights


• Illuminated (green) Indicates EXT TEST switch positioned to 1 or 2 and
circuit continuity normal.

157 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CARGO FIRE Panel

EXT FWD/AFT TEST lights


• FWD/AFT (green) Indicates cargo fire TEST switch pushed and fire bottle discharge squib circuit
continuity normal.

FWD/AFT DET SELECT switches


• NORM Detection loop A and loop B both active.
• A Only detection loop A active.
• B Only detection loop B active.

DETECTOR FAULT button


• Push Tests circuits for both forward and aft cargo fire detector loops and suppression
system.
NOTE: Does not illuminate during cargo fire test.

CARGO FIRE FWD/AFT warning lights


• FWD/AFT (red) At least one detector in each loop detects smoke.
With power failed in one loop, at least one detector on remaining loop detects
smoke.
NOTE: Master FIRE WARN lights also illuminate and fire warning bell sounds.

FWD/AFT ARMED switches


• ARMED (FWD) Arms extinguisher for forward cargo compartment.
(AFT) Arms extinguisher for aft cargo compartment.
NOTE: If first bottle discharged and system remains armed, second bottle discharge is inhibited upon
landing. Second bottle discharge timer (60 mins) disabled when system disarmed.

CARGO FIRE bottle DISCH light


• DISCH (amber) Extinguisher bottle(s) discharged.

CARGO FIRE DISCH switch


• Push If system armed, discharges armed extinguisher bottle.

158 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Weather RADAR Panel

GAIN control
• Rotate Sets receiver sensitivity in WX, WX+T, and MAP modes.
• CAL Optimum receiver sensitivity preset for best weather RADAR display.

MODE Selector
• WX Displays weather RADAR returns at selected gain level.
• WX+T Displays weather RADAR returns and turbulence within 50 miles.
• WX (MAN)
• MAP Displays ground returns.
• TEST Tests weather RADAR system operation without transmitting.

TILT
• Rotate (clockwise) Tilts RADAR antenna up to selected degrees above horizon.
(counter-clockwise) Tilts RADAR antenna down to selected degrees below horizon.

159 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Transponder Panel

XPNDR selector
• 1 Selects transponder #1.
• 2 Selects transponder #2.

ALT SOURCE selector


• 1 Enables altitude reporting from air data computer #1.
• 2 Enables altitude reporting from air data computer #2.

XPNDR FAIL light


• XPNDR FAIL (amber) Indicates transponder malfunction.

ATC code screen


Displays transponder code and operating transponder (1 or 2).

ATC code selectors (L/R)


• Rotate Sets transponder code.

IDENT switch
• Push Transmits identification signal.

Transponder mode selector


• STBY (outer) Transponder does not transmit.
• ALT RPTG OFF (outer) Transponder operates without altitude reporting.
• XPNDR (outer) Transponder operates with altitude reporting.
• TA (outer) Enables display of traffic advisory (TA) targets.
• TA/RA (outer) Enables display of traffic advisory (TA) and resolution advisory (RA) targets.
• TEST (inner) ATC transponder functional test.

160 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

RUDDER and AILERON Control Panel

RUDDER TRIM indicator


Indicates units of rudder trim.

RUDDER TRIM OFF flag (electronic panel only)


• In view (amber) Rudder trim indicator inoperative.

AILERON trim switches


Spring-loaded to neutral.
• Rotate Concurrent movement of both switches repositions aileron neutral control position.

RUDDER TRIM control knob


Spring-loaded to neutral.
• Rotate Electrically trims rudder in desired direction.

161 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

VHF COMM Panel (L/R)

Active FREQ light


• Illuminated (white) Related frequency selected.

FREQ indicators (L/R)


Indicates selected frequency.

TFR switch
The left selects left frequency as active for transceiver and the right selects right frequency as active for
transceiver.

FREQ SEL controls (L/R)


• Rotate Selects frequency in related indicator:
(outer) Changes three left digits.
(inner) Changes three right digits.

COMM TEST switch


• Push Removes automatic squelch feature, permitting reception of background noise and
testing receiver operation. Improves reception of weak signals.

162 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

VHF NAV Control (L/R)

ACTIVE frequency indicator


Indicates frequency selected by frequency selector.

STANDBY frequency indicator


Indicates tuned frequency.

TFR switch
• TFR Interchanges STANDBY frequency and ACTIVE frequency.

TEST switch
• Push With VOR frequency tuned and course of 000 selected:
1. Displays VOR fail flag.
2. Deviation bar biases out of view and returns to centered position.
3. Bearing pointer slews to 180 degrees.
DME displays:
1. DME fail flag.
2. Dashes.
3. Normal DME distance.
With ILS frequency tuned and course within 90 degrees of airplane heading:
1. Pointers disappear and LOC and G/S flags appear momentarily.
2. Pointers appear and display one dot up and one dot left.
3. Pointers then display one dot low and one dot right.
4. Pointers then return to normal display.
DME displays:
1. DME fail flag.
2. Dashes.
3. Normal DME distance.

Frequency selector
• Rotate Manually selects standby frequency.

163 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Audio Control Panel (ACP) (L/R)

MIC SELECTOR switches


• Illuminated Related switch active.
• Push 1. Selects related communication system for subsequent transmission.
2. Only one switch may be selected at a time; pushing a second switch deselects
first switch.
3. Reception possible over selected system regardless of whether related receiver
switch is on.

Receiver switches
• Illuminated (white) Related switch active.
• Rotate Adjusts volume.
• 1st Push Selects reception of related communication system or navigation receiver. Multiple
switches may be selected.
• 2nd Push Deselects related system or receiver.

SPKR switch
• Illuminated (white) SPKR switch active.
• 1st Push Selects audio from selected receiver heard on overhead speaker.
• 2nd Push Deselects audio from selected receiver heard on overhead speaker.
• Rotate Adjusts overhead speaker volume.

Push-to-talk switch
Spring-loaded to neutral position.
• R/T Keys oxygen mask or boom microphone for transmission as selected by transmitter
selector.
• I/C Keys oxygen mask or boom microphone for direct transmission over flight
interphone and bypasses transmitter selector.

MASK BOOM switch


• MASK Selects oxygen mask microphone for transmissions.
• BOOM Selects boom microphone for transmissions.

164 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Filter switch
• V Receives NAV and ADF voice audio.
• B Receives NAV and ADF voice and range audio.
• R Receives NAV and ADF station identifier range (code) audio.

ALT NORM switch


• ALT Operates ACP in degraded mode.
• NORM Operates ACP normally.

165 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

FLOOD and PANEL Lighting

FLOOD light control


• Rotate Controls brightness of center pedestal flood light. Overhead spotlight directed at
thrust lever quadrant and center pedestal.

PANEL light control


• Rotate Controls brightness of background lighting in center pedestal.

166 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ADF Control Panel

ADF 1/2 frequency indicators


Indicates frequency selected and if system in ADF or antenna (ANT) mode.

Transfer (TFR) Switch


Selects ADF for display.

Mode Selector
• ADF Audio reception possible.
ADF bearing sent to the DUs and the standby radio magnetic indicator.
• ANT Audio reception optimized.
No ADF bearing data available.

Tone Switch
• OFF Disables tones.
• ON Adds tone to selected ADF receiver audio.

Frequency Selector
• Rotate Outer knob sets the hundreds number.
Middle knob sets the tens number.
Inner knob sets the tenths and ones number.

167 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

STAB TRIM Switch

STAB TRIM switch (guarded)


• OVRD Bypasses control column actuated stabilizer trim cutout switches to restore power to
Stabilizer Trim Switches.
• NORM Normal operating position.

168 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CAB DOOR Panel

CAB DOOR UNLOCKED


• Push Locks cabin door with DC power available.
• Illuminated (amber) Indicates cab door is unlocked.

169 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

170 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Control Wheel

1
4
2

1. Stabilizer Trim Switch.


2. Push-To-Talk Switch.
3. Autopilot Disengage Switch.
4. Memory Device.
5. Writing Pad Holder Clip.

Autopilot Disengage Switches


• 1st Push Disengages both autopilots.
Flashes A/P disengage lights.
A/P disengage warning tone sounds for a minimum of two seconds.
• 2nd Push Extinguishes A/P disengage lights and silences disengage warning tone.
Extinguishes A/P disengage lights and silences disengage warning tone after
automatic autopilot disengagement.
Stabilizer Trim Switches (spring-load to neutral)
• Push (both) Commands stabilizer trim in desired direction automatically.
Disengages autopilot if engaged.

AILERON TRIM Indicator


Indicates units of aileron trim.

Control Wheel
• Rotate Operates ailerons and flight spoilers in desired direction.

171 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Control Column
• Push/Pull Operates elevators in desired direction.
Stops electric trimming movement with opposing stabilizer.

PTT switches
• R/T Keys oxygen mask or boom microphone for transmission as selected by transmitter
selector.
• I/C Keys oxygen mask or boom microphone for direct transmission over flight
interphone and bypasses transmitter selector.

172 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Rudder Pedals

Rudder Pedals
• Push Controls rudder position.
Permits limited nose gear steering up to 7 degrees each side of center.

Adjustment Control Wheel


1. The fore and aft positions adjustment of the pedals is provided through an adjustment control wheel
between the left and right pedals. To adjust forward, turn the crank clockwise. To make an
adjustment aft, turn the control wheel counter clockwise to make the appropriate adjustment.

173 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Steering Tiller

Nose Wheel Steering Wheel


• Rotate Turns nose wheel up to 78 degrees in either direction.
Overrides rudder pedal steering.

Nose Wheel Steering Indicator


• LEFT Indicates nose wheel steering displacement left of center position.
• CENTER Maintains normal straight ahead position.

174 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CONTROL DISPLAY UNITS


Flight Management System (L/R)

CDU display
Displays FMS data pages.

Line select keys (L/R)


• Push 1. Selects page, procedure, or performance mode as applicable.
2. Moves data from selected line to scratchpad.
3. Moves scratchpad to selected line.
4. Deletes data from selected line when DELETE is shown in scratchpad.

175 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CDU function keys


• INIT REF Displays data initialization or reference data.
• RTE Input or change origin, destination, or route.
• CLB View or change climb data.
• CRZ View or change cruise data.
• DES View or change descent data.
• MENU Displays subsystems controlled by CDU.
• LEGS Evaluate or modify lateral and vertical data. Also controls PLAN mode display.
• DEP ARR Input or change departure and arrival procedures.
• HOLD Create holding patterns and show holding pattern data.
• PROG Displays dynamic flight and navigation data, including waypoint and destination
ETAs, fuel remaining, and arrival estimates.
• N1 LIMIT View or change N1 thrust limits.
• FIX Create reference points on map display.
• PREV PAGE Displays previous page related pages (for example, LEGS pages).
• NEXT PAGE Displays next page related pages.

BRT control
• Rotate Controls CDU display brightness.

EXEC light
• Illuminated (white) Active data modified but not executed.

EXEC key
• Push Executes data modification(s) and extinguishes EXEC light.

Alpha/numeric keys
• 1st Push Inserts selected characters in scratchpad.
Slash (/) key - puts “/” in scratchpad.
Plus Minus (+/–) key - first push puts “–” in scratchpad.
• Subsequent Alternate between “+” and “–”.
push

SP key
• Push Inserts a space in scratchpad.

DEL key
• Push Inserts DELETE in scratchpad.

176 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

CLR key
• Push Clears last entered scratchpad character.
Clears FMC induced scratchpad message.
• (hold) Clears all scratchpad data.

CALL light
• CALL (white) Subsystem other than FMC requesting control of CDU (e.g., ACARS).

FAIL light
• FAIL (amber) FMC failure.

MSG light
• MSG (white) FMC message displayed in scratchpad.

OFST light
• OFST (white) Lateral offset executed.

177 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

178 SECTION 7 - SIMULATOR SYSTEMS © Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited


Confidential
This document is protected by copyright laws and for use by
Pacific Simulators 2010 Limited and PS4.5 Operators only. If you
are not an authorised user of this document, please immediately
return it to its rightful owner or destroy the document.

SECTION 8 – SIMULATOR
OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT
PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual

Copyright © 2015

Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

All Rights Reserved

Revision Number: 1.1 – 10/09/2015


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

2 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................... 7

2. SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT TRAINING COURSE ................ 6

3. SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT CHECKRIDE ............................ 9

4. SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT CERTIFICATE TEMPLATE ...... 15

5. ENDORSEMENT LOGBOOK ENTRY TEMPLATE ..................................... 16

3 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

4 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1. This section of the PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual relates to the Simulator Operator
Endorsement Training Course for the ProJet Series PS4.5 FSTD (Flight Simulator Training
Device). The objective of this section of the manual is to provide the training course syllabus
and checkride details to endorse a participant to operate a PS4.5 FSTD.

1.2. The ‘Operator’ refers to an individual who is required to use the FSTD for any purpose, as
the responsible person for the simulator. This person may be the instructor, technician or
pilot. It is intended that the Operator is the instructor that is conducting the training session
using the simulator.

1.3. The PS4.5 Simulator Operator Endorsement does not have an expiration date. There is no
requirement for recency training or for the endorsement to be renewed, however, it is
highly recommended that remedial training is conducted if the operator has not used the
FSTD for more than six (6) months.

1.4. It is the manufacturer’s requirement that a PS4.5 FSTD can only be used for flying
operations if there is at least one (1) person present in the device that is endorsed on the
PS4.5 FSTD, as per this document. The device can be started and used as a ground/static
trainer with no flying operations without an endorsed operator present.

5 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2. SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT TRAINING COURSE

2.1. GENERAL:
1) The PS4.5 Simulator Operator Endorsement Training Course Instructor can be any
operator who has been previously endorsed on the device and holds a PS4.5 Simulator
Operator Endorsement Certificate.
2) The training course consists of two structured lessons, where each lesson is designed
to introduce new concepts, procedures and instructions while reinforcing what has
been previously taught.
3) The training course can be completed in groups of up to 3 participants at a time but is
ideally completed with only 1-2 participants.
4) On completion of the training course, the participant will be examined through a
checkride/practical assessment by the instructor.
5) Once the participant passed the checkride they will be awarded a PS4.5 Simulator
Operator Endorsement Certificate.

2.2. DURATION:
1) The total duration of the courses is typically between four and ten hours depending on
the level of experience of the individual(s). The duration of each lesson will be dictated
by individual competency and may be completed over more than one training session.
Each lesson must be successfully completed prior to proceeding with the next.

2.3. ENDORSEMENT PREREQUISTES AND ASSUMED KNOWLEDGE:


1) Prerequisites to completing the training course and receiving an endorsement to
operate the PS4.5 FSTD are to hold or have held a Private Pilots Licence (PPL). An
individual with sufficient ‘simulator’ experience (deemed suitable by the instructor
conducting the course) can conduct the course and hold an endorsement without a
PPL.
2) As the PS4.5 FSTD is based on a twin engine single-aisle jet airliner, it is assumed that
the participant has sufficient jet systems and jet aircraft operations knowledge to
operate the device. It is preferable for operators to hold or have held a Commercial
Pilots License (CPL), Instrument Rating (IR) and/or Air Transport Pilots License (ATPL),
however, this is not required.
3) Participants must have received and studied the following documentation prior to
commencing the training course:
i. PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual
ii. PS4.5 Simulator Maintenance Manual
iii. PS4.5 Flight Crew Operations Manual (FCOM)
iv. PS4.5 Start-up and Shutdown Checklist
v. PS4.5 Normal Checklist

6 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

2.4. TRAINING COURSE CONTENT:


The course instructor will cover the subject matter below to form the course structure and
content:

Lesson 1:
Approximate Duration: 2-6 hours (competency based)

Subject matter:
i. General simulator orientation and information
ii. PS4.5 manuals and documentation
iii. PS4.5 Emergency Evacuation Procedure and emergency equipment
iv. PS4.5 Start-up Procedure
v. PS4.5 Shutdown Procedure
vi. PS4.5 Visuals System and Projectors operation
vii. PS4.5 Flight Deck Orientation
viii. Simulator systems orientation including communications/headsets/masks operation,
air-conditioning operation, intercom operation, lighting operation and seat
operation
ix. Instructors Operating Station (IOS) and IOS Software
x. Daily Checklist procedure
xi. Maintenance Requirements
xii. Simulator Cleaning Requirements
xiii. Simulator fault resolution and reporting procedure
xiv. iPad use and operating procedures
xv. GoPro video recording use and operating procedures
xvi. Normal Pilot Operating Procedures including:
o Simulator Set-up using IOS
o CDU/FMC operations
o Pre-flight and Before Start Procedure
o Pushback, engine start and taxiing procedures
o Normal Takeoff procedure
o Climb and Cruise procedure
o General Handling Exercises (medium and steep turns, and stall recovery
procedure)
o Use of Autopilot Flight Director System (AFDS) and Autothrottle
o Descent and approach procedure
o ILS approach procedure
o Go-Around procedure
o Touch and Go procedure
o Circuit procedure
o Normal Landing procedure
o After Landing procedure
o Shutdown and Secure procedure

7 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

Lesson 2:
Approximate Duration: 2-4 hours (competency based)

Subject matter:
i. Non-normal Pilot Operating Procedures relevant to simulator use. These could
include, but are not limited to the following:
o Use of Quick Reference Handbook (QRH)
o Engine start malfunction procedure
o Engine Failure procedure
o Engine Fire procedure
o Rapid Depressurisation and Emergency Descent procedure
o Any other procedure as required/requested
ii. Instructor Procedures including:
o Inflight use of IOS software and Instructor Controls
o Advanced set-up procedures
o Briefings
o Post-flight procedures
o Pilot Introduction and Briefing Procedures
iii. PS4.5 Simulator Operator Endorsement Checkride
iv. Procedure for training and endorsing new PS4.5 FSTD Operators

8 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

3. SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT CHECKRIDE

3.1. GENERAL:
1) The PS4.5 Simulator Operator Endorsement Checkride is conducted and assessed by
the course instructor as part of Lesson 2 of the Operator Endorsement Training Course.
2) The checkride involves the participant satisfactorily demonstrating the competencies
set in the checkride including starting the simulator, setting up for a flight, flying one
circuit, then shutting down the simulator.
3) The course instructor will assess the participant against the Checkride Form detailed
below to ensure the participant is competent in operating the PS4.5 FSTD.

3.2. CHECKRIDE PROCEDURE:


1) The following procedure is to be used by the Instructor to guide the participant
through the checkride. All items are to be completed by the participant without
assistance from the instructor or any other participant. The participant is permitted to,
and encouraged to use notes, manuals and checklists to complete each procedure.
i. Start-up the Simulator
ii. Set-up the simulator to ‘ready for takeoff’ state at the holding point of a
desired runway at a designated airport, to conduct circuits. Set-up to include
engine start-up procedure and programming the FMC.
iii. Conduct one (1) circuit including normal takeoff procedure, use of the
autothrottle, use of the AFDS and ILS approach to full-stop landing.
iv. Shutdown and Secure aircraft after landing
v. Shutdown the Simulator
vi. Demonstrate understanding of simulator fault resolution and fault reporting
procedure

2) The checkride will be assessed by the course instructor using the Checkride Form on
the following page.
3) If the participant passes the checkride:
i. The Checkride Form should be placed in a folder and stored for future records.
ii. The participant’s details should be logged on the PS4.5 Simulator Operator
Endorsement List at the front of the master PS4.5 Simulator Operations Manual,
stored inside the simulator.
iii. The participant should be awarded a PS4.5 Simulator Operator Endorsement
certificate.
4) If the participant fails the checkride, the instructor will provide remedial training in the
areas where the student performed unsatisfactorily. The student may then attempt
the checkride.

9 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

10 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT


CHECKRIDE FORM
OPERATOR NAME TESTING OFFICER NAME DATE

OVERALL RESULT (circle one)

PASS / RESIT REQUIRED

I ____________________(Testing Officer), certify that ____________________ (Operator),


has satisfactorily completed the PS4.5 Simulator Endorsement Training Course and passed
the PS4.5 Simulator Endorsement Checkride. He/she is qualified to operate Pacific
Simulators ProJet Series PS4.5 Flight Simulator Training Devices (FSTD).

Testing Officer Signature: Date:

____________________ _________________

Operator Signature: Date:

____________________ _________________

SCORING GUIDELINES
Each item assessed will be scored satisfactory or unsatisfactory.

ALL ITEMS ASSESSED MUST BE SCORED SATISFACTORY TO PASS THE CHECKRIDE.

The Instructor will award scores for the assessed item areas in line with the following schedule:

Result Parameters

 Satisfactory: Detail was completed in accordance with the PS4.5 Simulator


Operations Manual and the content delivered during training, without prompting
and/or the person’s knowledge of the detail was correct and in-depth.

 Unsatisfactory: Performance was unsatisfactory. Knowledge and demonstration of


Operating Procedures were poor. If an Unsatisfactory score is given for any item, the
participant automatically fails the checkride.

11 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

SCORE SHEET

SEQUENCE SCORE COMMENTS


Demonstrates the correct procedure for
starting the Simulator following the PS4.5
Start-up Checklist.

Demonstrates a sounds understanding of


simulator emergency procedures including
the emergency evacuation procedure.

Demonstrates a sound understanding of the


Instructors Operating Station (IOS) software
and sets the simulator up correctly.

Demonstrates a sound understating of the


simulator systems and the simulated aircraft
systems.

Demonstrates a sound understanding of the


Pilot Operating Procedures:
• Performs Pre-flight through to
Before Takeoff procedures correctly
including programming the CDU and
engine start procedure
• Performs Takeoff, Circuit, ILS
approach and full-stop landing
following correct procedures
• Performs aircraft shutdown and
secure procedures correctly.

Demonstrates a sound understanding of the


Autopilot Flight Director System (AFDS) and
Auto-throttle.

Demonstrates the correct procedure for


shutting down the Simulator following the
PS4.5 Shutdown Checklist.

Demonstrates a sound understanding of the


Simulator Fault Resolution and Reporting
Procedure.

Demonstrates an overall high level of


competency of operating a PS4.5 FSTD.

 Satisfactory  Unsatisfactory

OVERALL RESULT: PASS / FAIL

12 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

ADDITIONAL REMARKS:

_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________

13 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

This page left intentionally blank

14 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

4. SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT CERTIFICATE TEMPLATE

Simulator Operator
Endorsement Certificate
CERTIFICATE NO. PS-AA-001

This is to certify that

Bob Smith
is endorsed to operate a Pacific Simulators ProJet Series
PS4.5 Flight Simulator Training Device (FSTD)

This person has successfully completed the


PS4.5 Simulator Operator Endorsement Training Course and is hereby
approved to operate a PS4.5 FSTD as per the manufacturer’s requirements.

8th May 2015

Julian D’Arcy Russell Hubber


Head of Flight Operations and Training Director of Operations
Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd

15 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PS4.5 SIMULATOR OPERATIONS MANUAL

5. ENDORSEMENT LOGBOOK ENTRY TEMPLATE

5.1. The following can be used as a template for the PS4.5 Simulator Operator Endorsement
entry in Instructor’s logbooks, if required by a training organisation:

Pacific Simulators ProJet Series PS4.5 FSTD


- Simulator Operator Endorsement

This certifies that on the……day of………year………,


…………………………, ARN…………, has completed a
training course in accordance with the simulator
manufacturer, Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd, and has
passed the checkride to be endorsed as a PS4.5
Simulator Operator.

……………………………………
CFI/CP/Head of Training

……………………………………
Training Operator

Date: ……………………

16 SIMULATOR OPERATOR ENDORSEMENT © Pacific Simulators 2010 Ltd


PACIFIC SIMULATORS 2010 LIMITED

UNIT 2 / 103 MAIN SOUTH ROAD


P.O. BOX 6737
CHRISTCHURCH
NEW ZEALAND

TEL: +64-3-3430864 | FAX: +64-3-3430863

www.pacificsimulators.com

You might also like